R&S ZNA26 User Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. R&S Manuals
  4. Measuring Instruments
  5. ZNA26
  6. User manual

R&S ZNA26 User Manual

Vector network analyzers
Hide thumbs Also See for ZNA26:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
®
R&S
ZNA
Vector Network Analyzers
User Manual
(;ÜÎÌ2)
1178646202
Version 20

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for R&S ZNA26

Summary of Contents for R&S ZNA26

  • Page 1 ® R&S Vector Network Analyzers User Manual (;ÜÎÌ2) 1178646202 Version 20...
  • Page 2 ZNA vector network analyzer models: ● ® R&S ZNA26, 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz, 2 test ports, 3.5 mm (m) connectors, order no. 1332.4500K22 ● ® R&S ZNA26, 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz, 4 test ports, 3.5 mm (m) connectors, order no. 1332.4500K24 ●...

  • Page 3: Table Of Contents

    ® Contents R&S Contents 1 Safety and regulatory information............15 Safety instructions......................15 Warning messages in the documentation..............18 Korea certification class A..................18 2 Welcome to the R&S ZNA..............19 What's new in firmware version 2.41.................19 2.1.1 Changes in firmware version 2.40.................20 Documentation overview....................24 2.2.1 Getting started manual....................24...
  • Page 4 ® Contents R&S 3.2.1 Front panel........................39 3.2.2 Rear panel........................45 Operating the instrument................... 48 3.3.1 Manual operation......................48 3.3.2 Control elements of the application window..............52 3.3.3 Touchscreen gestures....................58 3.3.4 Working with dialogs..................... 61 3.3.5 Handling diagrams, traces, and markers..............62 3.3.6 Entering data.........................66 3.3.7...
  • Page 5 ® Contents R&S 4.3.8 Delay, aperture, electrical length................. 140 Operations on traces....................141 4.4.1 Limit check........................141 4.4.2 Trace files........................149 Calibration......................... 158 4.5.1 Calibration types......................160 4.5.2 Calibration standards and calibration kits..............172 4.5.3 Calibration pool......................178 4.5.4 Calibration labels......................178 4.5.5 Automatic calibration....................179 4.5.6...
  • Page 6 ® Contents R&S 4.7.16 Smart fixture de-embedding..................270 4.7.17 Delta-L 4.0 PCB characterization................271 4.7.18 Health and usage monitoring service (HUMS)............272 4.7.19 Internal 3rd and 4th source for 4-port R&S ZNA............273 4.7.20 Precision frequency reference..................273 4.7.21 Second internal LO generator for 4-port R&S ZNA.............273 4.7.22 Internal 2nd source and 2nd LO generator for 2-port R&S ZNA.........
  • Page 7 ® Contents R&S 5.2.4 Ratio tab........................318 5.2.5 Noise Figure tab......................322 5.2.6 Intermodulation tab..................... 334 5.2.7 Gain Compression tab....................346 5.2.8 Time Domain tab......................349 5.2.9 Time Gate tab......................349 5.2.10 Power Sensor tab......................350 5.2.11 Spectrum tab.......................351 5.2.12 External DLL tab......................355 5.2.13 Scalar Mixer Meas tab....................
  • Page 8 ® Contents R&S 5.6.3 Circle Test tab......................444 5.6.4 Display Circle tab......................448 5.6.5 Horiz. Line tab......................449 Marker softtool......................450 5.7.1 Markers tab......................... 450 5.7.2 Marker Props tab......................453 5.7.3 Marker Search tab.......................456 5.7.4 Multiple Peak tab......................462 5.7.5 Target Search tab......................464 5.7.6 Bandfilter tab.......................
  • Page 9 ® Contents R&S 5.12.1 Channels tab....................... 597 5.12.2 Port Config tab......................612 5.12.3 Pwr Cal Settings tab....................631 5.13 Mode softtool......................631 5.13.1 Mode tab........................631 5.13.2 Pulse Mod tab......................636 5.13.3 Source Coherence rab....................646 5.13.4 Timer Settings tab....................... 650 5.14 Offset Embed softtool....................651 5.14.1 Offset Embed dock widget..................
  • Page 10 ® Contents R&S 5.17.3 Distance to Fault application..................761 5.18 Display softtool......................769 5.18.1 Diagram tab.........................770 5.18.2 Split tab........................773 5.18.3 Config tab........................775 5.18.4 View Bar tab........................ 783 5.18.5 Touchscreen tab......................784 5.19 Setup softtool......................785 5.19.1 Setup tab........................785 5.19.2 Freq. Ref. tab.......................811 5.19.3 Remote Settings tab....................813 5.19.4...
  • Page 11 ® Contents R&S 6.3.3 Initiating measurements, speed considerations............860 6.3.4 Addressing traces and channels................. 861 Command processing....................862 6.4.1 Input unit........................862 6.4.2 Command recognition....................863 6.4.3 Data base and instrument hardware................863 6.4.4 Status reporting system....................864 6.4.5 Output unit........................864 6.4.6 Command sequence and command synchronization..........
  • Page 12 ® Contents R&S 7.3.11 MMEMory commands....................1176 7.3.12 OUTPut commands....................1217 7.3.13 PROGram commands....................1222 7.3.14 [SENSe:] commands....................1225 7.3.15 SOURce commands....................1408 7.3.16 STATus commands....................1480 7.3.17 SYSTem commands....................1483 7.3.18 TRACe commands....................1519 7.3.19 TRIGger commands....................1522 7.3.20 New commands for R&S ZNA...................1532 HUMS and service date commands..............1544 7.4.1 SNMP/REST commands...................1544 7.4.2...
  • Page 13 ® Contents R&S 9.1.1 Asynchronous errors....................1633 9.1.2 Errors during measurement..................1633 Errors during firmware installation/update............1634 Collecting information for technical support............1634 Contacting customer support................1636 10 Transporting..................1637 11 Maintenance, storage and disposal..........1638 11.1 Cleaning........................1638 11.2 Storage........................1638 11.2.1 Disposal........................
  • Page 14 ® Contents R&S User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 20...

  • Page 15: Safety And Regulatory Information

    ® Safety and regulatory information R&S Safety instructions 1 Safety and regulatory information The product documentation helps you use the product safely and efficiently. Follow the instructions provided here and in the following chapters. Intended use The product is intended for the development, production and verification of electronic components and devices in industrial, administrative, and laboratory environments.
  • Page 16 ® Safety and regulatory information R&S Safety instructions move or carry the product. Do not lift by the accessories mounted on the product. Accessories are not designed to carry the weight of the product. To move the product safely, you can use lifting or transporting equipment such as lift trucks and forklifts.
  • Page 17 ® Safety and regulatory information R&S Safety instructions ● Only use the power cable delivered with the product. It complies with country-spe- cific safety requirements. Only insert the plug into an outlet with protective conduc- tor terminal. ● Only use intact cables and route them carefully so that they cannot be damaged. Check the power cables regularly to ensure that they are undamaged.

  • Page 18: Warning Messages In The Documentation

    ® Safety and regulatory information R&S Korea certification class A 1.2 Warning messages in the documentation A warning message points out a risk or danger that you need to be aware of. The sig- nal word indicates the severity of the safety hazard and how likely it will occur if you do not follow the safety precautions.

  • Page 19: Welcome To The R&S Zna

    ® Welcome to the R&S ZNA R&S What's new in firmware version 2.41 2 Welcome to the R&S ZNA This manual is intended to provide you with all information that is necessary for setup, manual and remote control of the R&S ZNA. We also invite you to find out what's new in the current revision of the software and learn how to make best use of our documentation and of the help system.

  • Page 20: Changes In Firmware Version 2.40

    ® Welcome to the R&S ZNA R&S What's new in firmware version 2.41 Firmware version ► To check your R&S ZNA firmware version, select "Help" > "About..." from the main menu. 2.1.1 Changes in firmware version 2.40 New functionality ● Firmware support of VDI - Erickson power meters PM4 and PM5 "VDI Erickson power meters PMx and PM4"...
  • Page 21 ® Welcome to the R&S ZNA R&S What's new in firmware version 2.41 New remote control features ● Source coherence (R&S ZNA-K6): New command SOURce<Ch>:CMODe: to set the phase span PORT<Pt>:PHASe:SPAN ● "Remote Language" PNA: Command SOURCE:POWER1:ATT:AUTO is now accep- Note that the related functionality is not available on the R&S ZNA and hence the query always returns 0.
  • Page 22 ® Welcome to the R&S ZNA R&S What's new in firmware version 2.41 ● Distance to Fault measurements (R&S ZNA-K2): Cable type attenuations can be defined for frequencies > 6 GHz ● The integrated license server was updated to version 1.31.0.1568 ●...
  • Page 23 ® Welcome to the R&S ZNA R&S What's new in firmware version 2.41 ● For time domain traces, CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNC:DOMAIN:USER commands did not accept values with units (and returned a misleading error mes- sage) ● For some multichannel configurations, calibration data could not be applied ●...

  • Page 24: Documentation Overview

    ® Welcome to the R&S ZNA R&S Documentation overview ● Some memory traces created using "Data & Func to New Mem" (or one of the cor- responding parser commands) were not properly loaded from recall set ● Controlled timing (R&S ZNA-K28): –...

  • Page 25: Instrument Security Procedures

    ® Welcome to the R&S ZNA R&S About this help The service manual is available for registered users on the global Rohde & Schwarz information system (GLORIS): https://gloris.rohde-schwarz.com 2.2.4 Instrument security procedures Deals with security issues when working with the R&S ZNA in secure areas. It is avail- able for download on the Internet.
  • Page 26 ® Welcome to the R&S ZNA R&S About this help Launching Help To open the Help system, use one of the following methods: ● Select the "Help" icon from the toolbar ● Press the "Help" button in a dialog. ● If you use an external keyboard, press F1.
  • Page 27 ® Welcome to the R&S ZNA R&S About this help To search topics for a text string 1. Switch to the "Search" tab. 2. Double-tap inside the "Search" entry field to open the analyzer's on-screen key- board. 3. Enter the string you want to find. If you enter several strings with blanks between, the search returns topics contain- ing all those strings (same as AND operator).

  • Page 28: Getting Started

    ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for use 3 Getting Started Note: the following chapters are identical to those in the printed R&S ZNA Getting Started manual. ● Preparing for use.....................28 ● Instrument tour......................39 ● Operating the instrument..................48 ● Performing measurements..................75 3.1 Preparing for use Here, you can find basic information about setting up the product for the first time.

  • Page 29: Setting Up The Product

    ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for use Electromagnetic compatibility classes The electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) class indicates where you can operate the product. The EMC class of the product is given in the data sheet under "General data". ● Class B equipment is suitable for use in: –...
  • Page 30 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for use Left = Stacked correctly Right = Stacked incorrectly, too many products 3. NOTICE! Overheating can damage the product. Prevent overheating as follows: ● Keep a minimum distance of 10 cm between the fan openings of the product and any object in the vicinity.

  • Page 31: Considerations For Test Setup

    ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for use To unmount the R&S ZNA from a rack 1. Loosen the screws at the rack brackets. 2. Remove the R&S ZNA from the rack. 3. If placing the R&S ZNA on a bench top again, unmount the adapter kit from the R&S ZNA.

  • Page 32: Connecting The Analyzer To The Ac Supply

    ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for use Preventing electrostatic discharge (ESD) Electrostatic discharge is most likely to occur when you connect or disconnect a DUT. ► NOTICE! Risk of electrostatic discharge. Electrostatic discharge can damage the electronic components of the product and the device under test (DUT). Ground yourself to prevent electrostatic discharge damage: a) Use a wrist strap and cord to connect yourself to ground.

  • Page 33: Standby And Ready State

    ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for use After power-on, the analyzer automatically goes to standby or ready state, depend- ing on the state of the standby toggle key at the front panel when the instrument was switched off last time. 2.

  • Page 34: Windows Operating System

    ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for use Observe the instructions for startup and shutdown in Chapter 3.1.7, "Switching the instrument on and off", on page 32. 3.1.9 Windows operating system ® The analyzer is equipped with a Windows operating system which has been config- ured according to the instrument's features and needs.

  • Page 35: Minimizing The Vna Application

    ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for use Firewall settings A firewall protects an instrument by preventing unauthorized users from gaining access to it through a network. Rohde & Schwarz highly recommends using the firewall on your instrument. Rohde & Schwarz instruments are shipped with the Windows firewall enabled.

  • Page 36: Connecting External Accessories

    ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for use A software update restores the original shortcut properties. 3.1.11 Connecting external accessories The analyzer's standard PC interfaces (Monitor, USB, LAN) can be used to connect various accessories: ● ® An external monitor displays the Windows desktop plus the vector network ana- lyzer (VNA) application windows.
  • Page 37 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for use The R&S ZNA also offers a DisplayPort. Safety aspects The monitor must be connected while the instrument is switched off (or in standby mode). Otherwise correct operation cannot be guaranteed. 3.1.11.2 Connecting a keyboard A keyboard can be connected to any of the USB connectors.
  • Page 38 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for use Printer driver installation If necessary, the printer driver installation is initiated using the operating system's "Add Printer Wizard". The wizard is self-explanatory. A printer driver must be installed only once. A great variety of printer drivers is available on the analyzer. To obtain the complete ®...

  • Page 39: Instrument Tour

    ® Getting Started R&S Instrument tour 3.2 Instrument tour This chapter gives an overview of the control elements and connectors of the R&S ZNA and gives all information that is necessary to put the instrument into opera- tion and connect external devices. 3.2.1 Front panel The front panel of a R&S ZNA consists of a large-scale capacitive touchscreen and the test port area below it.
  • Page 40 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument tour Application Window Control Window Function Keys Data Entry Panel Screen saver The screen saver function of the operating system can be used to switch off the display if the analyzer receives no command for a selectable period of time. The display is switched on again when the touchscreen is touched.
  • Page 41 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument tour The Trace keys give access to all trace settings, to the limit check settings, and to the marker functions including marker search. ● [Meas]: select the measured and displayed quantity. ● [Format]: define how measured data (traces) are presented. ●...
  • Page 42 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument tour ● [Preset]: restores preset values. Control window: data entry panel The controls in the data entry panel are used to enter numbers, units, and characters. The appearance of the panel depends on the data type of the setting selected in the Application window.
  • Page 43 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument tour – Yellow, flashing: the R&S ZNA is configured for external synchronization, but cannot lock on the external reference clock. ● Cal. Indicates the calibration state of the active setup. – Off: none of the traces (in the active setup) has a valid calibration –...
  • Page 44 The test ports and three USB connectors are located on the front panel of the R&S ZNA. Test ports Numbered connectors: ● 3.5 mm male for R&S ZNA26 ● 2.92 mm (K) or 2.4 mm male for R&S ZNA43 ● 2.4 mm male for R&S ZNA50 ●...

  • Page 45: Rear Panel

    ® Getting Started R&S Instrument tour Meas. Receiver Meas Out Ref. Receiver Ref Out PORT Generator Source Out The direct generator/receiver access can be used to insert external components (exter- nal signal separating devices, power amplifiers, extension units etc.) into the signal path.
  • Page 46 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument tour Table 3-2: Rear panel elements available on all instruments Index Label Description System Drive Removable system drive of the R&S ZNA, containing all software (including the operating system and the VNA application) and data. No other drive is built in. Do not remove the system drive during operation.
  • Page 47 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument tour Index Label Description External Handler IO Used to connect an external Handler I/O (option R&S ZNBT-Z14), providing a Centronics 36 input/output connector. Not yet supported. External Data Logger Digital interface for data streaming. Requires "Data Streaming Memory" option R&S ZNA-B7 (not yet available). SMA connector for external reference clock input or output.

  • Page 48: Operating The Instrument

    ® Getting Started R&S Operating the instrument 3.3 Operating the instrument The following sections describe the basics of manual operation, i.e. how to access instrument functions and settings via the analyzer GUI. Manual operation is particularly useful for getting to know the instrument and for trouble shooting. Manual and remote control of the instrument Manual control of the R&S ZNA is possible either via its touchscreen (without using a mouse and/or keyboard), via locally connected monitor + mouse + keyboard (see...
  • Page 49 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the instrument Using the Touchscreen To access an instrument function: 1. Press a (virtual) key, e.g. the [Meas] key in the Trace section. The corresponding softtool expands at the current docking position. 2. Make sure the "S-Params" radio button is selected. 3.
  • Page 50 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the instrument 4. Select a control element, e.g. "a1 Src Port 1". The diagram immediately reflects your selection. The active trace shows the mea- surement results for the selected measured quantity. A control element with three dots (e.g. System – [Setup] > "Setup" > "System Con- fig...") opens a dialog, containing a group of related settings, a wizard or additional information.
  • Page 51 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the instrument Using the menu bar The menu bar at the bottom of the application screen provides alternative access to all instrument functions. To repeat the measured quantity selection described above, ► Select Trace – [Meas] > "S-Params" > "Wave" > "a1 Src Port 1". The diagram immediately reflects your selection.

  • Page 52: Control Elements Of The Application Window

    ® Getting Started R&S Operating the instrument 2. Select "a1 Src Port 2". 3.3.2 Control elements of the application window The application window of the analyzer provides all control elements for the measure- ments and contains the diagrams for the results. There are several alternative ways for accessing an instrument function: ●...
  • Page 53 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the instrument These methods are described in more detail in the following sections. For further reference: ● Refer to Chapter 4.2.1, "Display elements of a diagram", on page 97 to obtain information about the results in the diagram. ●...
  • Page 54 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the instrument The toolbar is divided into several icon groups, separated by vertical lines. These icons represent the undo and redo actions that are also available via the menu bar items "System" > "Undo" / "Redo". Undo reverses the last action, redo reverses the last undo action (if possi- ble).
  • Page 55 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the instrument 3.3.2.3 Softtools Softtools display groups of related settings as a tabbed panel. They can be opened via function keys, or via menu bar and context menu items. Figure 3-4: Scale softtool A softtool is a tabbed panel with a close icon. When the softtool is closed, the close icon is replaced by a "hamburger"...
  • Page 56 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the instrument Overview of menu functions ● The "File" menu provides functions to handle recall sets and trace files, to print or save diagram content, and to shut down the VNA application. ● The "Trace" menu provides all trace settings, the limit check settings, and the marker functions including marker search.
  • Page 57 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the instrument ● A menu command with three dots appended calls up a dialog providing several related settings. Example: "Search Range" opens a dialog to define the search range for the marker search. ● A menu command with no arrow or dots initiates an immediate action. Example: "Max"...

  • Page 58: Touchscreen Gestures

    ® Getting Started R&S Operating the instrument ● Select "Hard Key" from the context menu of the softtool panel. 3.3.2.7 Status bar The status bar shows ● the active channel ● the current channel's sweep averaging counter (e.g. "Ch<i>: Avg 9/10"), or "Ch<i>: Avg None"...
  • Page 59 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the instrument Figure 3-6: Tapping Double-tapping Tap the screen twice, in quick succession. Double-tap a diagram to maximize it or to restore its original size. Dragging Move your finger from one position to another on the display, keeping your finger on the display the whole time.
  • Page 60 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the instrument Figure 3-8: Pinching While "Zoom Select" is active (toolbar icon or softtool button is toggled on), spread- ing and pinching is disabled. You can only select a rectangular area (using one fin- ger) then. ●...

  • Page 61: Working With Dialogs

    ® Getting Started R&S Operating the instrument 3.3.4 Working with dialogs Dialogs provide groups of related settings and allow to make selections and enter data in an organized way. The settings are visualized, if possible. An example is shown below. All dialogs are operated in a similar way.

  • Page 62: Handling Diagrams, Traces, And Markers

    ® Getting Started R&S Operating the instrument 3.3.5 Handling diagrams, traces, and markers The analyzer displays measurement results as traces in rectangular diagrams. Markers are used to read specific numerical values and to search for points or regions on a trace.
  • Page 63 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the instrument 3. In the dialog box that is opened when you release the "New Trace" icon, select the S-parameter to be measured. For a four-port analyzer: The R&S ZNA generates a new trace for the selected S-parameter. User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─...
  • Page 64 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the instrument Alternative control elements To measure a different quantity, select Trace – [Meas]. Drag and drop a softkey repre- senting a measured quantity to create a trace. Or simply select another softkey to change the measured quantity of the active trace. Select Trace –...
  • Page 65 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the instrument Active trace, alternative control elements The trace line of the active trace in the upper part of the diagram is highlighted. If the diagram contains several traces, first activate the target trace, then add the marker. The Trace –...

  • Page 66: Entering Data

    ® Getting Started R&S Operating the instrument Screen element Action Drag and drop... Delete Chapter 3.3.5.3, "Deleting display elements", on page 65 Trace Create Chapter 3.3.5.1, "Adding new traces and diagrams", on page 62 Move vertically Reference line marker (right diagram edge) Move into other or new Trace line diagram...
  • Page 67 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the instrument "Control window: data entry panel" on page 42. In single-window mode (System – [Display] > "Config" > "Single Window Mode") only the application window is shown, with its virtual Hardkey panel enabled. The values can be edited in place, either using an external keyboard or by calling the VNA's numeric editor or on-screen keyboard (see Chapter 3.3.6.2, "Using the numeric...
  • Page 68 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the instrument 2. Use the buttons in the numeric keypad to compose the numeric input value. 3. If desired, select a "Step Size" and use the cursor up/down buttons to increment/ decrement the current value. If a marker is active, you can also set the numeric value to the current marker value ("Set to Marker").
  • Page 69 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the instrument For the following procedure, we assume single-window mode. 1. Activate a character data input field in a softtool or a dialog. 2. Double-tap/click the input field to open the on-screen keyboard. 3. Select character buttons to compose the input string. 4.

  • Page 70: Scaling Diagrams

    ® Getting Started R&S Operating the instrument 2. Select "External Tools" 3. Select "Screen Keyboard". 3.3.7 Scaling diagrams The analyzer provides various tools for customizing the diagrams and for setting the sweep range. Choose the method that is most convenient for you. 3.3.7.1 Using the graphical zoom The graphical zoom function magnifies a rectangular portion of the diagram (zoom win-...
  • Page 71 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the instrument The zoomed view shows the selected rectangle, scaled in both horizontal and verti- cal direction. In general, the zoom window covers only a part of the sweep range; the horizontal distance between the sweep points increases. The reduced display range is indicated in an additional zoom line in the channel info area.
  • Page 72 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the instrument 3.3.7.2 Setting the sweep range The sweep range for all related channels is displayed in the channel info area at the bottom of each diagram: To change the sweep range of the active channel, use one of the following methods: ●...
  • Page 73 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the instrument 3.3.7.4 Auto scale The "Auto Scale" function adjusts the scale divisions and the reference value so that the entire trace fits into the diagram. To access "Auto Scale", use one of the following methods: ●...
  • Page 74 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the instrument To set the sweep range using markers, use one of the following methods. Set "Start" and "Stop" values in the diagram: 1. Create two normal markers, e.g. the markers "Mkr 1" (default label "M1") and "Mkr 2"...

  • Page 75: Performing Measurements

    ® Getting Started R&S Performing measurements Marker" to move the trace towards the lower diagram edge, or select "Ref Val = Marker" to move the trace towards the "Ref Value". You can also use marker values in the "Numeric Editor"; see Chapter 3.3.6.2, "Using the numeric editor",...
  • Page 76 ® Getting Started R&S Performing measurements 3.4.1.1 Connecting the instrument for transmission measurements To prepare a transmission measurement, you have to connect your DUT (which for simplicity we assume to have appropriate connectors) in-between a pair of analyzer test ports. It is recommended that you preset the R&S ZNA to start from a well-defined instrument state.
  • Page 77 ® Getting Started R&S Performing measurements 3.4.1.2 Selecting the sweep range and other parameters After a system preset the display shows a diagram with a dB magnitude scale, and the S-parameter S is selected as a measured quantity. This S-parameter is the forward transmission coefficient of the DUT.
  • Page 78 ® Getting Started R&S Performing measurements errors, the accuracy requirements of the measurement, on the test setup and on the types of calibration standards available. The following example requires a calibration kit with a male Through standard with known transmission characteristics for the related test port connector type and gender. With a single Through, it is possible to perform a transmission normalization, compen- sating for a frequency-dependent attenuation and phase shift in the signal paths.
  • Page 79 ® Getting Started R&S Performing measurements 7. Select the test port connector type and gender (here: N 50 Ω, female, correspond- ing to a male Through standard), and the calibration kit (here: R&S ZV-Z121). 8. Tap "Start Cal". 9. The calibration dock widget indicates the standard measurements that make up a "Trans Norm"...
  • Page 80 ® Getting Started R&S Performing measurements To proceed with the measurement, remove the Through standard and connect the DUT again. 3.4.1.4 Evaluating data The analyzer provides various tools to optimize the display and analyze the measure- ment data. For instance, you can use markers to determine maxima and minima on the trace, and change the display format to obtain information about the group delay of the transmitted wave.
  • Page 81 ® Getting Started R&S Performing measurements Refer to Chapter 4.2.3, "Trace formats", on page 113 to learn more about the diagram properties. 3.4.1.5 Saving and printing data The analyzer provides standard functions for saving measurement settings and for saving or printing the results. You can use these functions as if you were working on a standard PC.

  • Page 82: Reflection S-Parameter Measurement

    ® Getting Started R&S Performing measurements 7. In the "Save" dialog: a) Select a file location ("Look in:"). b) Enter a name for the recall set file ("File name:"). c) Select "Save". The analyzer saves the active recall set, containing channel, stimulus and trace settings, to a znxml file.
  • Page 83 ® Getting Started R&S Performing measurements ● Some of the trace formats are particularly suited for reflection measurements. For instance, you can display the measured reflection coefficient S in a Smith chart to obtain the complex input impedance at port 1. Proceed as described in Chapter 3.1.7, "Switching the instrument on and off",...

  • Page 84: Concepts And Features

    ® Concepts and features R&S Basic concepts 4 Concepts and features The following chapter provides an overview of the analyzer's capabilities and their use. It contains a description of the basic concepts that the analyzer uses to organize, proc- ess and display measurement data. Also included are descriptions of the screen con- tents, possible measured quantities, calibration methods and typical test setups.

  • Page 85: Softtools

    ® Concepts and features R&S Basic concepts ● Cal pool data including system error correction and power correction data ● Directories for trace data, limit lines, calibration data etc. ● Color schemes and printer settings ● System configurations, to be accessed via System – [Setup]. ●...
  • Page 86 ® Concepts and features R&S Basic concepts 4.1.3.1 Trace settings The trace settings specify the mathematical operations used to obtain traces from the measured or stored data. They can be divided into several main groups: ● Selection of the measured quantity (S-parameters, wave quantities, ratios, impe- dances,...) ●...

  • Page 87: Sweep Control

    ® Concepts and features R&S Basic concepts 4.1.3.3 Active and inactive traces and channels A window can display several diagrams simultaneously, each with a variable number of traces. One of these traces is active at each time. The active trace is highlighted in the trace list on top of the active diagram (Trc4 in the figure below): When a trace is selected in the diagram area, it becomes the active trace.
  • Page 88 ® Concepts and features R&S Basic concepts By default, sweeps are repeated continuously. Alternatively, a measurement can also consist of a single sweep or of a specified number of sweeps. After changing the channel settings or selecting another measured quantity, the ana- lyzer needs some time to initialize the new sweep.
  • Page 89 ® Concepts and features R&S Basic concepts Use the "Alternated" mode to increase the accuracy of measurements on DUTs with long level settling times (e.g. quartzes, SAW filters). To measure DUTs with short set- tling times and obtain a trace from the beginning of the sweep, use "Chopped" mode. In "Auto"...
  • Page 90 ® Concepts and features R&S Basic concepts Parallel Measurements with Frequency Offset When performing parallel measurements, it is possible to specify a minimum frequency offset between the port groups. This is particularly useful for situations where "Cross- talk" between different DUTs would otherwise make the simultaneous measurement impossible (e.g.
  • Page 91 ® Concepts and features R&S Basic concepts Sweep type [Start](unit) [Stop] (unit) [Center] (unit) [Span] (unit) "Power" "Start Power" (dBm) "Stop Power" (dBm) "CW Frequency" (Hz) "CW Frequency" (Hz) "CW Mode" "CW Frequency" (Hz) "Number of Points" (-) "CW Frequency" (Hz) "CW Frequency"...

  • Page 92: Automatic Level Control

    ® Concepts and features R&S Basic concepts Both "Imb Start Phase" and "Imb Stop Phase" must be in the range between -180° dBm and 180°. The analyzer generates a balanced signal with configurable fre- quency and power, however, the relative phase of the two components is varied according to this range.

  • Page 93: Data Flow

    ® Concepts and features R&S Basic concepts ALC IF IF filter (analog): normal IF filter (analog): wideband, narrowband band- (dB) (ms) (ms) (dB) (ms) (ms) width control control 10 kHz 0.66 0.042 0.35 0.025 0.215 100 kHz 0.11 0.0014 0.04 0.315 0.003 0.031...
  • Page 94 ® Concepts and features R&S Basic concepts Note that the channel data flow for S-parameters (and quantities derived from S- parameters such as impedances, admittances, stability factors) differs from the chan- nel data flow for wave quantities (and derived quantities such as ratios). RAW WAVE Channel data flow QUANTITIES...
  • Page 95 ® Concepts and features R&S Basic concepts Wave de-/embedding In its original implementation, de-/embedding was calculated on the S-parameter branch of the channel calculation chain. After applying factory calibration and/or user calibration on the measured wave quantities, intermediate results were transformed to the S-parameter domain.
  • Page 96 ® Concepts and features R&S Basic concepts Channel data flow for all traces AVERAGE of the channel Trace 1 Mem 1,1 Mem 1,2 Trace 2 Mem 2,1 Mem 2,2 Unformatted Trace data flow TRACE MATH for individual traces SHIFT RESPONSE TIME DOMAIN GATE *...

  • Page 97: Screen Elements

    ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements 4.2 Screen elements This section describes manual operation of the analyzer, including trace settings, mark- ers and diagrams. For a description of the different quantities measured by the instru- ment, refer to Chapter 4.3, "Measurement results", on page 122.
  • Page 98 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements 4.2.1.1 Title An optional title across the top of the diagram can be used for a brief description of the diagram contents. Select System – [Display] > "Diagram" > "Title" to enter the diagram title and "Show Title"...
  • Page 99 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements of the triangle can be changed to modify the diagram scale and shift the trace verti- cally. ● Measured quantity (for the active trace): The measured quantity is indicated in the trace list; see "Trace list and trace settings"...
  • Page 100 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements ● The format section shows how the measured data is presented in the graphical display. Use the context menu of the format section to change the format of the related trace. ● The next sections show the value of the vertical or radial diagram divisions ("Scale Div.") and the reference value ("Ref").
  • Page 101 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements 4.2.1.3 Markers Markers are tools for numerical readout of measured data and for selecting points on the trace, or, in general, in the diagram area. A marker is displayed with a symbol (e.g. a triangle, a crossbar or a line) on the trace, which can be a data trace or a memory trace.
  • Page 102 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements If the marker position is adjusted using the roll key, the mouse or the cursor keys, it always remains within the sweep range. If set explicitly by entering a numeric value, the marker position can be outside the sweep range. In this case, the marker symbol is automatically positioned to the start or stop value of the sweep range, whichever is closer.
  • Page 103 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements ● To change the format of the active marker, select [TRACE] > "Marker" > "Marker Properties" > "Marker Format". ● To express the coordinates of the active marker relative to the reference marker, activate the delta mode [TRACE] >...
  • Page 104 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements Marker Format Description Formula Real Real part of z Re(z) = x Imag Imaginary part of z Im(z) = y (Voltage) Standing Wave Ratio SWR = (1 + |z|) / (1 – |z|) dB Mag Phase Magnitude of z in dB and phase in two lines 20 * log|z| dB arctan ( Im(z) /...
  • Page 105 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements ***) Only avaiilable for transmission measurements (see Chapter 4.3.3.1, "Converted impedances", on page 127) Marker coupling It connects the markers of a set of traces. Marker coupling allows you to compare different measurement results (assigned to dif- ferent traces) at the same stimulus value.
  • Page 106 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements Multiple peak search Multiple peak search allows you to find multiple local minima/maxima at once. Markers 1 to 10 are assigned to the peaks detected from the start frequency towards the stop frequency. Multiple peak search uses its own search and tracking settings; search and tracking settings for standard marker search are ignored.
  • Page 107 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements ● "Loss" is the loss of the filter at its maximum (or minimum) and is equal to the response value of marker no. 1. For an ideal bandpass filter, the loss is zero (0 dB), for an ideal bandstop filter it is –∞...
  • Page 108 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements sweeps) or the CW frequency (for power sweeps), and the measurement band- width ("BW"). ● Stop indicates the highest value of the sweep variable (e.g. the highest frequency measured), corresponding to the right edge of a Cartesian diagram. Open a segment's context menu to access common related tasks.

  • Page 109: Dialogs

    ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements The functions of the context menu can also be called using the menu bar or the related softtool panels. Use whatever method is most convenient. 4.2.2 Dialogs Dialogs provide groups of related settings and allow to make selections and enter data in an organized way.
  • Page 110 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements In most dialogs, however, it is possible to cancel an erroneous input before it takes effect. The settings in such dialogs must be confirmed explicitly. The two types of dialogs are easy to distinguish: ●...
  • Page 111 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements ● "Look in:" specifies the directory to be listed. The icons to the right of the pull-down list are provided for easy navigation in the file system (place the cursor on the icons to obtain "Whats this" help). ●...
  • Page 112 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements 4.2.2.3 Multi-channel setup dialog Depending on the desired DUT and measurement type, the measurement channel has to be prepared in a particular way. The multi-channel setup dialog was invented to make this task as easy as possible. Figure 4-2: Multi-channel setup dialog The buttons in the optional "Setup"...

  • Page 113: Trace Formats

    ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements log to find out more about the resulting frequncy ranges and possible frequency range violations: After the channel configuration is applied, the related setup dialog and mode can be recalled at any time using the wrench icon in the main toolbar. When reopened, the "Reset"...
  • Page 114 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements Diagram representation When a Cartesian trace is assigned to a diagram, the stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis (x-axis), the response values appear on the vertical axis (y-axis). Graph Scaling ● Except for the "Log Mag" format, the y-axis scale is always linear. ●...
  • Page 115 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements Trace Format Description Formula "Lin Mag" Magnitude of z, unconverted |z| = sqrt ( x "Real" Real part of z Re(z) = x "Imag" Imaginary part of z Im(z) = y "Delay" Group delay, neg. derivative of the –...
  • Page 116 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements Example: Reflection coefficients in polar diagrams If the measured quantity is a complex reflection coefficient (S etc.), then the cen- ter of the polar diagram corresponds to a perfect load Z at the input test port of the DUT (no reflection, matched input).
  • Page 117 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements In a diagram, the grid lines overlaid to a "Smith" trace correspond to points of equal resistance R and reactance X: ● Points with the same resistance are located on circles. ● Points with the same reactance produce arcs. The following example shows a Smith chart with a marker used to display the stimulus value, the complex impedance Z = R + j X and the equivalent inductance L.
  • Page 118 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements Example: Reflection coefficients in the Smith chart If the measured quantity is a complex reflection coefficient Γ (e.g. S ), then the unit Smith chart can be used to read the normalized impedance of the DUT. The coor- dinates in the normalized impedance plane and in the reflection coefficient plane are related as follows (see also: definition of matched-circuit (converted) impedances): From this equation, it is easy to relate the real and imaginary components of the com-...
  • Page 119 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements Inv Smith For "Inv Smith" formatted traces, the response values are interpreted as complex reflection coefficients S and represented in terms of their corresponding complex admittance Y(S ) = G(S ) + j B(S In a diagram, the grid lines overlaid to a "Smith"...
  • Page 120 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements The basic properties of the inverted Smith chart follow from this construction: ● The central horizontal axis corresponds to zero susceptance (real admittance). The center of the diagram represents Y/Y = 1, where Y is the reference admittance of the system (zero reflection).
  • Page 121 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements Examples for special points in the inverted Smith chart: ● The magnitude of the reflection coefficient of a short circuit (Y = infinity, U = 0) is one, its phase is –180 deg. ●...

  • Page 122: Measurement Results

    ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results Complex dimensionless quan- Complex quantities with dimensions: Real quantities: tities: Wave quantities, Z-parameters, Y- S-parameters and ratios parameters, impedances, admittan- Smith ON (reflection coefficients S – – Polar – – Inverted Smith ON (reflection coefficients S –...
  • Page 123 ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results Meaning of 2-port S-parameters The four 2-port S-parameters can be interpreted as follows: ● is the reflection coefficient of DUT port 1, i.e. the ratio between outgoing wave and incident wave a in a forward measurement with matched DUT port 2: , if |a | >...
  • Page 124 ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results The indices of the S-parameters described so far number the output and input ports of a DUT; the parameters are referred to as single-ended S-parameters. The S-parameter description can also be used to differentiate between different propagation modes of the waves at the output and input ports.

  • Page 125: Reference Impedances

    ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results Redefined Physical Port 1 a wave: b b wave: b Source: Port 1 Redefined Physical Port 2 a wave: a b wave: b Source: Port 4 coupler Figure 4-5: Two redefined ports High Signal Power When dealing with external signal amplification, make sure that: ●...
  • Page 126 ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results Conversion formula for wave quantities and S-parameters Renormalization transforms the "raw" S-matrix S for the default reference impedances (with physical port number index i = 1,2,...,n) into a "renormalized" S-matrix S the modified reference impedances Z .

  • Page 127: Impedance Parameters

    ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results             4.3.3 Impedance parameters An impedance is the complex ratio between a voltage and a current. The analyzer pro- vides two independent sets of impedance parameters: ●...
  • Page 128 ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results Example: For a 2-port DUT that is terminated at its output with the reference impedance Z is the input impedance (matched-circuit impedance measured in a forward reflection measurement). A converted impedance Z completely describes a one-port DUT. The calculation formula of the converted reflection impedances Z depends on the waveguide circuit theory according to which...
  • Page 129 ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results The calculation formula of a converted parallel transmission impedance Z depends on the waveguide circuit theory according to which Reference impedances are calculated. Table 4-6: Calculation of Converted Parallel Transmission Impedances Traveling Waves Power Waves 4.3.3.2 Z-parameters...

  • Page 130: Admittance Parameters

    ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results The four 2-port Z-parameters can be interpreted as follows: ● is the input impedance, defined as the ratio of the voltage V to the current I measured at port 1 (forward measurement with open output, I = 0).

  • Page 131: Wave Quantities And Ratios

    ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results The four 2-port Y-parameters can be interpreted as follows: ● is the input admittance, defined as the ratio of the current I to the voltage V measured at port 1 (forward measurement with output terminated in a short circuit, = 0).
  • Page 132 ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results Examples for using wave quantities The wave quantities provide the power at the different receive ports of the analyzer. This is different from an S-parameter measurement, where the absolute power of a lin- ear device is canceled.
  • Page 133 ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results Examples: ● "b Src Port 1" is the ratio of the outgoing wave at DUT port 2 and the incident wave at DUT port 1 (i.e. DUT port 1 ist stimulated). This corresponds to the forward transmission coefficient S ●...

  • Page 134: Unbalance-Balance Conversion

    ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results point. Normal detector mode ensures that the measurement is performed at maxi- mum speed and that a meaningful complex result is obtained. ● "AVG" collects all valid results at each sweep point during the "Detector Meas Time"...
  • Page 135 ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results Internal balance- unbalance conversion Logical Physical VNA ports VNA ports Common Differential mode mode Balanced port Physical transformer (balun) Unbalance-balance conversion avoids the disadvantages of real transformers: ● There is no need to fabricate test fixtures with integrated baluns for each type of DUT.
  • Page 136 ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results Example: 2 physical ports: Reflection measurements on 1 balanced port Balanced port: Differential mode Log. Bal. port port Common mode 3 physical ports: Reflection and transmission measurements on 1 balanced port Single-ended Balanced port: (unbalanced) port Differential mode Single...
  • Page 137 ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results The notation of a general S-parameter is S , where <mout> and <min> <mout><min><out><in> denote the output and input port modes, <out> and <in> denote the output and input port numbers. Meaning of 2-port mixed mode S-parameters The mixed mode 2-port S-parameters can be interpreted as follows: ●...
  • Page 138 ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results 3. DUT with one balanced and one single-ended port. 4. DUT with two balanced ports or one balanced and two single-ended ports. Both device types are fully characterized by 4x4 mixed mode S-matrices. 4.3.6.3 Imbalance and common mode rejection An ideal unbalance-balance transformer (balun) converts an unbalanced signal into a...

  • Page 139: Stability Factors

    ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results Logical port i Logical port j (single-ended) (balanced) Physical port c Single- Log. Balanced Physical port a ended port port port Physical port d – = –S and Imb = –S – CMRR and CMRR dsji csji...

  • Page 140: Delay, Aperture, Electrical Length

    ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results Stability factors are calculated as functions of the frequency or another stimulus parameter. They provide criteria for linear stability of two-ports such as amplifiers. A lin- ear circuit is said to be unconditionally stable if no combination of passive source or load can cause the circuit to oscillate.

  • Page 141: Operations On Traces

    ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces where Δt is the propagation time of the wave across the DUT, which often can be expressed in terms of its mechanical length L , the permittivity ε, and the velocity of mech light c.
  • Page 142 ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces The following rules ensure a maximum of flexibility: ● Segments do not have to be sorted in ascending or descending order (e.g. the "Start Stimulus" value of segment no. n does not have to be smaller than the "Start Stimulus"...
  • Page 143 ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces Logarithmic interpolation The analyzer offers a logarithmic interpolation mode that allows you to carry over the limit line definition to logarithmic sweeps. While "Show Limit Line" is active, the diagrams display all limit line segments. Exception: In a segmented frequency sweep with point-based x-axis, gaps between the segments are minimized.
  • Page 144 ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces 4.4.1.2 Rules for ripple test definition The analyzer places few restrictions on the definition of ripple limit ranges. The following rules ensure a maximum of flexibility: ● Ranges do not have to be sorted in ascending or descending order (e.g. the "Start Stimulus"...
  • Page 145 ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces The limit line rules for logarithmic sweeps and segmented frequency sweeps with point-based x-axis also apply to ripple limit lines (see Chapter 4.4.1.1, "Rules for limit line definition", on page 141). 4.4.1.3 Circle limits A circle limit is a special type of upper limit line which is defined by its center coordi- nate in the diagram and its radius.
  • Page 146 ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces ● With a circle limit line adjusted to the right border of a Smith diagram (Z = infinity), you can check whether the imaginary part of the impedance (Im(Z), reactance) falls below a limit. User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─...
  • Page 147 ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces ● With a circle limit line centered on the left border of an inverted Smith diagram (Y = infinity), you can check whether the imaginary part of the admittance (Im(Y), sus- ceptance) falls below a limit. User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─...
  • Page 148 ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces 4.4.1.4 File format for limit lines The analyzer uses a simple ASCII format to export limit line data. By default, the limit line file has the extension *.limit and is stored in the directory shown in the "Save Limit Line"...

  • Page 149: Trace Files

    ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces Compatibility with other instruments The VNAs of the R&S ZNx and R&S ZVx families use the same file format. Limit line files can be interchanged without restriction. 4.4.1.5 File format for ripple limits The analyzer uses a simple ASCII format to export ripple limits.
  • Page 150 By convention, Touchstone files use file extensions .snp, where n is the number of network ports. The following displays an s1p export file in "Version 1.1 (ZNx)" format: 50.00 ! Rohde & Schwarz Vector Network Analyzer ! Rohde-Schwarz,ZNA26-4Port,1332450024100005,2.20 ! Created: UTC 12/24/2020, 5:20:26 PM ! My Comment ! freq[Hz]...
  • Page 151 ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces ● Blank lines are permitted. Option line Each Touchstone file must contain an option line with the following structure: # <frequency unit> <parameter> <data format> R <reference resistance> ● # indicates the beginning of the option line ●...
  • Page 152 Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces ! Rohde & Schwarz Vector Network Analyzer ! Rohde-Schwarz,ZNA26-4Port,1332450024100005,2.20 The first line is fixed, the second reflects the configurable identification string of the instrument. Timestamp The timestamp comment line reflects the time at which the Touchstone file was cre- ated.
  • Page 153 ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces Up to port reordering, which is possible via "snp free config" export and via logical port assignment, the order in which the parameter data occur is the one described in the Touchstone 1.1 standard. See "Network parameter data"...
  • Page 154 ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces [Keyword] argument1 argument2 ... Keywords are new in Touchstone standard version 2.0. They are not allowed in version 1.1 files. The purpose of the keywords is to give more details about the file contents in a stand- ardized way.
  • Page 155 ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces Network parameter data The network parameter data section contains one block of network parameters per fre- quency point. Each block is preceded by a frequency value, i.e. the first entry in the first (or only) data line of a data block is a frequency value.
  • Page 156 ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces The "snp Free Config" export mode allows you to define ● the set of (physical) ports whose S-parameters shall be exported and ● the order in which they are exported The examples above represent the simple scenario with consecutive ports {1,...,n} and natural ordering.
  • Page 157 ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces Renormalization of S-parameters Renormalization means that the S-parameters at connector impedances are converted to S-parameters at certain target impedances. During Touchstone export, the S-parameters can be renormalized in two ways: ● Common target impedance The <reference resistance>...

  • Page 158: Calibration

    ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration or dB Mag-Phase, respectively. The data format for export files can be selected in the Export Data dialog. ● <imTrace2>... second response value of second trace: im<Trace_Name> for output format Re/Im, ang<Trace_Name> for output formats lin. Mag-Phase or dB Mag- Phase.
  • Page 159 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration Calibration or system error correction is the process of eliminating systematic, reprodu- cible errors from the measurement results (S-parameters and derived quantities). The process involves the following stages: 1. A set of calibration standards is selected and measured over the required sweep range.

  • Page 160: Calibration Types

    ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration Cal Off label A label "Cal Off" appears in the trace line if the system error correction no longer applies to the trace: This can happen for one of the following reasons: ● The sweep range is outside the calibrated frequency range. ●...
  • Page 161 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration Calibration Type Standards Parameters Error Terms General Accuracy Application Reflection OSM Open, Short, for Port i Reflection tracking, High Reflection measure- ments on any port. Match Source match Directivity, One Path Two Ports Open, Short, for fixed source Reflection tracking, Medium to high...
  • Page 162 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration Calibration Type Standards Parameters Error Terms General Accuracy Application Reflect (at both Reflection tracking, High, high directiv- Reflection and ports), transmission mea- (n-port) Source match, surements, espe- Through, Line1, Directivity, cially for planar cir- other Lines cuits.
  • Page 163 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration ● calibration..................... 167 ● calibration...................... 168 ● calibration......................170 ● Full n-Port calibration with reduced number of Through connections....170 ● Complementary isolation measurement..............171 ● Mixer calibrations....................172 4.5.1.1 Normalization (reflection, transmission) A normalization is the simplest calibration type since it requires the measurement of only one standard for each calibrated S-parameter: ●...
  • Page 164 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration A reflection OSM calibration is more accurate than a normalization but is only applica- ble for reflection measurements. 4.5.1.3 One Path Two Ports Calibration A one path two ports calibration combines a reflection OSM (full one-port) calibration with a transmission normalization.
  • Page 165 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration Number of ports Number of standards Number of standard Number of error terms to be connected measurements 2 * 3 2 * 3 2 * 3 +1 = 7 +2 * 1 = 8 + 2 * 2 = 10 3 * 3 3 * 3...
  • Page 166 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration DUTs of this sort are also known as noninsertable devices. A suitable calibration kit is then required for each of the different connector types. The kit must include, as a minimum, the standards that are used for one-port calibration. The through-connection between test ports with different connector types must be made using adapters.
  • Page 167 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration Figure 4-7: Adapter Removal vs. UOSM The obtained adapter characteristics are mathematically removed from the obtained error coefficients. Uncertainties arising from a non-ideal characterization of the unknown through almost cancel, whereas they add up in the UOSM technique. As a consequence, Adapter Removal will provide more accurate results.
  • Page 168 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration unknown but must be nonzero; its phase must be roughly known (90 deg). The magni- tude and phase of the reflection coefficient must be the same at both test ports. TRM calibration is especially useful for DUTs in test fixtures. 4.5.1.9 TRL calibration A TRL (Through –...
  • Page 169 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration ● A TRM extension at low frequencies requires either a Match or a Sliding Match standard. The standard must be measured at each port. The complete list of measured standards for a two-port calibration is shown below. ●...
  • Page 170 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration A second or third Line in the list does not mean that you have to measure two or three Line standards. If the calibrated frequency range is small enough, the calibration is valid when the analyzer has acquired correction data for a single Line standard. The Match and Sliding Match standards are not necessary for TRL calibration.
  • Page 171 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration To establish a sufficient set of Through connections, you can select an arbitrary test port as the "center" and measure all Through connections to this test port ("star-sha- ped calibration"). You can also connect all ports in increasing order, e.g. 1→2, 2→3, 3→4 ...

  • Page 172: Calibration Standards And Calibration Kits

    ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration There is no dedicated physical standard for isolation measurement; it is recommended to terminate the test ports suitably (e.g. with 50 Ω loads). 4.5.1.13 Mixer calibrations All "(U)OSM Scalar/Vector Mixer" calibrations mentioned in Table 4-7 are based on the Reflection OSM calibration or the...
  • Page 173 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration 4.5.2.1 Calibration standard types The following table gives an overview of the different standards and their circuit models (offset and load models). Table 4-8: Calibration standard types Standard Type Characteristics Ideal Standard Offset Model Load Model ∞...
  • Page 174 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration ● The loss is the energy loss along the transmission line due to the skin effect. For resistive lines and at RF frequencies, the loss is approximately proportional to the square root of the frequency. In Keysight mode, the offset loss is expressed in units of Ω/s at a frequency of 1 GHz.
  • Page 175 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration 4.5.2.2 Cal kit parameter types The analyzer uses three types of parameters to describe the calibration standards. The parameter type is the same for all standards in a kit and therefore appended to the kit name: ●...
  • Page 176 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration The following additional parameters are used: ● Characteristic impedance: Z (characteristic impedance of the connector type) ● Loss: 0 dB / sqrt(GHz) or (0 GΩ / s) in Keysight mode ● All inductance and capacitance parameters are set to zero. 4.5.2.3 Sliding Match standards The Sliding Match is a one-port standard consisting of an air line with a movable, low-...
  • Page 177 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration The analyzer combines the data in an appropriate manner: ● The Match results are used up to the lower edge of the specified frequency range of the Sliding Match (Min Freq). ● The Sliding Match results are used for frequencies above the Min Freq. In general, the Sliding Match provides better results than the Match within its specified fre- quency range.

  • Page 178: Calibration Pool

    ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration na.support.keysight.com/vnahelp/products.html. The decimal separator used by the ® VNA Cal Kit Manager V2.1 depends on the language version of the Windows operat- ing system: Cal kit files generated on an English operating system contain dots, the ones generated on a German system contain commas.

  • Page 179: Automatic Calibration

    ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration Table 4-10: Calibration labels (system error correction) Label Meaning The system error correction is applied without interpolation. This means that a set of measured correction data is available at each sweep point. Cal int The system error correction is applied, however, the correction data for at least one sweep point is interpolated from the measured values.
  • Page 180 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration Advantages of automatic calibration Automatic calibration is faster and more secure than manual calibration, because: ● There is no need to connect several standards manually. The number of connec- tions to be performed quickly increases with the number of ports. ●...
  • Page 181 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration Recommended use ● The calibration unit is intended for direct connection to R&S ZNA network ana- lyzers following the procedure described above. You can also connect the unit before switching on the analyzer. Do not connect the unit to other USB hosts, e.g. a PC, or insert any USB hubs between the analyzer and the unit, as this may dam- agethe unit or the host.
  • Page 182 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration Accuracy considerations To ensure an accurate calibration, please observe the following items: ● Unused ports of the calibration unit must be terminated with a 50 Ω match. ● No adapters must be inserted between the calibration unit and the test ports of the analyzer.
  • Page 183 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration 4.5.5.3 Characterization of calibration units Each calibration unit is delivered with factory characterization data which ensure an accurate calibration for all standard applications. For specific modifications of the test setup, e.g. the connection of additional adapters to a calibration unit, a modified set of characterization data (suitable for the cal unit with adapters) may be desirable.
  • Page 184 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration thermal vacuum chamber (TVAC), a recalibration using traditional calibration kits or calibration units is a costly and time consuming process. The Rohde & Schwarz inline calibration system (ICS) R&S ZN-Z3x allows recalibrating a running measurement setup without mechanically changing it. For each DUT port, an inline calibration unit (ICU) is inserted between the corresponding VNA test port and the DUT.
  • Page 185 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration Figure 4-10: ICC R&S ZN-Z30 For more information, see the R&S ZN-Z3x product pages at https://www.rohde- schwarz.com/product/NetworkAnalyzer_Acc_ZNZ3. Firmware integration The control connection between R&S ZNA and ICC is established via USB. After the VNA firmware has detected the ICC, it requests information about connected ICUs from the ICC.
  • Page 186 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration Because the ICC does not support hot plugging of ICUs, connect the ICUs to the ICC before connecting the ICC to the R&S ZNA. The VNA firmware supports: ● Pulling characterization data for the connected ICUs from the ICC ●...
  • Page 187 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration Step 1: OSM g) Step 2: Unknown Through 5. Connect the DUT to the calibrated setup and perform the required measurements 6. Refresh the calibration in situ, whenever required. a) Restart the calibration b) Perform OSM measurements c) Skip Through measurements 4.5.5.5 Calibration validation...
  • Page 188 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration Basic mode When "Cal Validation" is launched for the first time, it runs in basic mode. In this mode, the R&S ZNA automatically detects the instrument ports connected to the cal unit, and only validates connected ports. Thus, if a 2-port cal unit is connected to a 4-port cali- brated channel, only the two connected instrument ports are validated against the cal unit.
  • Page 189 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration For a channel with more calibrated ports than cal unit ports available, you can change the port assignments and rerun the automated validation. Or you can switch to advanced mode and validate each port manually. Advanced mode In advanced mode you can configure the validation settings (reference characteriza- tion, deviation limits) and run or rerun particular measurements (reflection at port p with...
  • Page 190 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration The multiple port assignment method considerably extends the range of applications of the calibration units. However, the method entails some loss of convenience because you have to reconnect the calibration unit between the different calibration stages (assignments).

  • Page 191: Scalar Power Calibration

    ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration the accuracy of the calculated Throughs. Additional port assignments can improve the accuracy, if they add more measured through connections. Example: The following examples show minimal port assignments for a Full 9-Port calibration using a four-port calibration unit: Table 4-11: Full n-port: Star-shaped optimum solution Test Port Assignment 1...
  • Page 192 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration Calibration of S-parameters S-parameters are not affected by a scalar power calibration. S-parameters are ratios of incident and outgoing waves: for linear DUTs, they do not depend on the absolute power. For measurements on non-linear DUTs, a SMARTerCal is recommended. A SMARTerCal is also appropriate for frequency conversion measurements.
  • Page 193 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration 4.5.6.1 Source power calibration A source power calibration ensures accurate power levels of the generated waves at an arbitrary calibration plane in the measurement path. Typically the calibration plane corresponds to the input of the DUT. In a frequency sweep, the power at the calibration plane is maintained at a constant "Cal Power"...
  • Page 194 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration based on the previously calibrated reference receiver. This speeds up the calibra- tion procedure but does not impair its accuracy. Tip: It is also possible to perform the source (flatness) calibration using a power meter (without previously calibrating the reference receiver).
  • Page 195 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration width of 10 kHz. Smaller IF bandwidths are maintained during the calibration sweep; larger bandwidths are restored after the sweep. The analyzer measures the power at each sweep point, compares the result with the nominal power of the source, and com- piles a correction table.
  • Page 196 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration A lower label in the list has priority over the higher labels (e.g. if the power calibration is interpolated and the source power is changed, then the label PCao is displayed). Interpolation and extrapolation The analyzer can interpolate and extrapolate power correction data so that a source or receiver power calibration can be reused after a change of the frequency sweep range: ●...

  • Page 197: Smartercal

    ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration B: Two-port at power meter (during calibration) Test and measurement procedure: 1. Perform the calibration with the additional two-port between the analyzer port and the power sensor. During the calibration, the analyzer increases the power sensor values by the 2-port transmission coefficients to move the calibration plane of the power calibration towards the input of the DUT.
  • Page 198 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration For an overview of measurements and recommended calibration methods refer to Table 4-13. 4.5.7.1 Calibration procedure A SMARTerCal is a fully menu-guided process which is performed like a regular sys- tem error correction. The calibration wizard defines the calibrated ports and the calibra- tion type;...
  • Page 199 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration SMARTerCal Type Based on ... Manual calibration Calibration unit ☑ ☐ PTNA ☑ ☐ P-Adapter Removal Adapter Removal The selection criteria for the SMARTerCal calibration types are identical to the criteria for system error corrections. For an overview, refer to Chapter 4.5.1, "Calibration types", on page 160.

  • Page 200: Parallel Calibration Of Multiple Channels

    ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration The receiver power calibration included in the SMARTerCal is not indicated separately. If a SMARTerCal is combined with an additional scalar source power calibration (see Chapter 4.5.7.3, "Combining SMARTerCal with scalar power calibration", on page 199), the trace list may contain an addition power calibration label according to Chap- ter 4.5.6.3, "Power calibration...

  • Page 201: Offset Parameters And De-/Embedding

    ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding Joins calibrations of the same port set, but with different overlapping frequency ranges. The resulting calibration is of the same kind and applies to the same port set, but covers the joint frequency range. ●...
  • Page 202 ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding For a non-dispersive DUT, the delay defined above is constant over the considered fre- quency range and equal to the negative derivative of the phase response for the fre- quency (see mathematical relations). The length offset parameters compensate for a constant delay, which is equivalent to a linear phase response.
  • Page 203 ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding 2. In the Channel – [Offset Embed] > "Offset" softtool tab, select "Auto Length". The delay is displayed in the "Delay" field, the cable length (depending on the "Velocity Factor") in the "Mech. Length" field. It is also possible to determine cable lengths using a transmission measurement.
  • Page 204 ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding been assigned to the physical ports before, they are both corrected by the same amount. 4.6.1.4 Auto Length and Loss The "Auto Length and Loss" function determines all offset parameters at the active trace's receive port such that the residual group delay of the active trace (defined as the negative derivative of the phase response) is minimized and the measured loss is minimized as far as possible across a configurable frequency range.
  • Page 205 ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding The resulting offset parameters are displayed in the Channel – [Offset Embed] > "Off- set" softtool tab. Auto Length and Loss for balanced ports The "Auto Length and Loss" function can be used for balanced port configurations as well.
  • Page 206 ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding Open/Short vs. Open and Short compensation A non-ideal "Open" or "Short" termination of the test fixture connections during fixture compensation impairs subsequent measurements, causing an artificial ripple in the measured reflection factor of the DUT. If you observe this effect, an "Open and Short" compensation may improve the accuracy.

  • Page 207: Embedding And Deembedding

    ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding The sign of the phase shift is determined as follows: ● A positive offset parameter causes a positive phase shift of the measured parame- ter and therefore reduces the calculated group delay. ●...
  • Page 208 ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding This method provides a number of advantages: ● The measurement uncertainty is not impaired by the tolerances of real test fixtures. ● There is no need to fabricate test fixtures with integrated matching circuits for each type of DUT.
  • Page 209 ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding The first network is defined by its S-parameters stored in an imported two-port Touch- stone file (*.s2p). No additional parameters are required. The following networks are composed of a serial capacitance C or inductance L (as seen from the test port), followed by a shunt L or C.
  • Page 210 ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding 4.6.2.4 Circuit models for 4-port networks The lumped element 4-port transformation networks for (de-)embedding consist of the following two basic circuit blocks: ● A capacitor C connected in parallel with a resistor. ●...
  • Page 211 ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding The following networks are composed of two serial Cs or Ls (as seen from the analyzer test port), followed by a shunt C or L. They are named Serial Cs, Shunt L / Serial Ls, Shunt C / Serial Cs, Shunt C / Serial Ls, Shunt L.
  • Page 212 ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding The two port pair (de-)embedding networks in the figure below are based on port pairs 1, 2 and 1, 3 with appropriate sets of 4-port S-parameters. The R&S ZNA FW handles Port Pair De-/Embedding as a special case of Port set de-/ embedding.
  • Page 213 ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding Network Analyzer Embedding Network 2m-1 Figure 4-11: Port Set De-/Embedding As shown in section Combining Several de-/embedding networks, port set deembed- ding is calculated after single-ended deembedding, and the port set embedding step precedes single ended embedding.
  • Page 214 ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding ● For port pairs (i.e. for m=2), the de-/embedding network can be defined either via lumped element model (possibly in combination with s2p Touchstone files) or via a s4p Touchstone file, see Chapter 4.6.2.5, "Port pair de-/embedding", on page 211.
  • Page 215 ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding Differential Matching Network Balun In contrast to standard balanced embedding (4-port), the matching circuit is only applied to the differential mode port (2-port). It can be specified via a Touchstone s2p file or by parametrizing a lumped "Shunt L, Shunt C"...
  • Page 216 ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding Fixture Modeling Process For all supported tools, the fixture modeling proceeds as follows: 1. Perform a calibration to the fixture connectors. 2. Measure one or more PCB test coupons for the related fixture. The results are independent of a particular DUT.
  • Page 217 ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding Test Coupons for Lead-ins Test Coupons for Lead-outs 2x Through 2x Through 1x Open 1x Short 1x Open 1x Short Figure 4-13: Test Coupons (balanced) Test Coupons for Lead-ins Test Coupons for Lead-outs 2x Through 2x Through 1x Open...
  • Page 218 ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding Figure 4-15: De-/Embedding calculation flow This means that the real networks are removed before virtual networks are added. The (de-)embedding steps are carried out in the following order: 1. Single Ended Deembedding: every physical port can be deembedded from a single 2-port network 2.

  • Page 219: Optional Extensions And Accessories

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories 2. Single ended deembedding 3. Balanced port deembedding 4. Balanced port embedding 5. Single ended port embedding 4.7 Optional extensions and accessories The instrument can be upgraded with various software and hardware options, provid- ing enhanced flexibility and an extended measurement functionality.

  • Page 220: Spectrum Analyzer Mode

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories For a complete list of options, accessories, and extras refer to the product brochure or to the "Options" section of the R&S ZNA product pages on the Internet. The following sections provide an introduction to the software and hardware options described in this documentation.
  • Page 221 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories Trace selection Select a reflection parameter S to perform a time domain reflectometry (TDR) mea- surement, e.g. to detect cable faults. To measure the impedance of a network, you can select a converted impedance parameter Z←S Select a transmission parameters S...
  • Page 222 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories Table 4-17: Comparison of band pass and low pass modes Transform Band pass Low pass type Advantages Easiest to use: works with any set of equi- Higher response resolution (doubled) distant sweep points Includes information about DC value Real result Impulse and step response...
  • Page 223 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories Table 4-18: Properties of frequency windows Window Side lobe sup- Relative impulse Best for... pression width No Profiling (Rect- 13 dB – angle) Low First Side lobe 43 dB Response resolution: separation of (Hamming) closely spaced responses with compara- ble amplitude...
  • Page 224 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories is sufficiently above the f , the entire set of sweep points is shifted towards lower frequencies so that the stop frequency is decreased. If the start frequency of the sweep is close to f , then the sweep points can have to be shifted towards higher frequencies.
  • Page 225 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories Table 4-19: Properties of grid types Grid type: Keep Sweep Time Unambig- Algorithm fails if... time domain uous resolution range Stop freq. and no. of – points Freq. gap and no. of Stop frequency beyond upper fre- points quency limit...
  • Page 226 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories The gated trace is transformed back into frequency domain using a "No Profiling (Rect- angle)" window. The shape, width and position of the time gate affect the gated frequency domain trace. The window type selection in the "Define Transform" dialog is ignored. The selected window is used again when the TD trace is displayed ("Time Domain: On").
  • Page 227 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories blue arrow = direct signal red and green arrows = reflected signal TD S Calculation VSWR The ANSI time-domain method relies on a complex transmission measurement (S using a vector network analyzer (VNA). A time-domain transformation of the frequency domain data shows the impulse response between the two antennas.
  • Page 228 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.2.7 Distance-to-fault measurements Option R&S ZNA-K2 also offers a special distance-to-fault measurement that allows you to locate faults and discontinuities on cables and transmission lines. Faults produce peaks on the impulse response (in the time domain) that is calculated from the measured reflection S-parameter trace via inverse Fourier transformation.
  • Page 229 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories ● The maximum distance that can be measured is inversely proportional to the fre- quency span. The smaller the frequency span, the longer the maximum distance between the calibrated reference plane and the fault to be located. However, a smaller frequency span comes at the cost of a coarser distance resolu- tion.
  • Page 230 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories Figure 4-16: Eye Diagram (NRZ modulated) The measurement proceeds as follows: 1. The analyzer performs a frequency sweep. 2. The impulse response is calculated based on the results of the preceding fre- quency sweep.
  • Page 231 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories Figure 4-17: Eye Diagram Result Info Field The following results are available: ● Eye Minimum and Eye Maximum These values represent the minimum and maximum outputs of the eye diagram processing. These values include any over- and under-shoots seen during the symbol transitions.
  • Page 232 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories The Crossing Height is the height above "Eye Base" where the rising and falling edges cross, "Crossing Percent" gives the same value as a percentage of the "Eye Amplitude". ● Opening Factor This is a measure of the effects of amplitude noise on the vertical eye opening.
  • Page 233 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories Figure 4-19: Rise Time Measurement Skew Measurement The skew measurement allows you to compare the step responses calculated from dif- ferent traces measured on the same analyzer channel. The skew is calculated as the "delta time"...

  • Page 234: Frequency Conversion Measurements

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.3 Frequency conversion measurements Option R&S ZNA-K4 With option R&S ZNA-K4, the frequencies of the source ports can be configured inde- pendently. The source and receive frequencies of the ports are always equal. Arbitrary port settings represent a major extension to the analyzer's measurement functionality;...
  • Page 235 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories Internal Second Source For a 4-port R&S ZNA, a second internal source is available and hence the mixer mea- surements outlined above (and many other measurements) can be performed without an additional external generator. The limited source connectivity can be overcome with option R&S ZNA-B3 (see Chapter 4.7.19, "Internal 3rd and 4th source for 4-port R&S...
  • Page 236 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories The analyzer measures the intermodulation products of k order IMk (where k = 3, 5, 7, 9) at the lower tone frequency minus (k – 1)/2 times the tone distance and at the upper tone frequency plus (k –...
  • Page 237 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories Lower Tone Upper Tone The intermodulation distortion measurement can be extended to frequency-converting DUTs. E.g., it is possible to feed the two-tone source signal to the RF input of a mixer and measure the intermodulation distortion of the IF output signal, after conversion with an additional LO signal.
  • Page 238 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories For a 4-port R&S ZNA with four sources, the mixer's LO signal can also be provided by the VNA. Two-tone generation and combination To generate a two-tone signal, two independent RF signal sources are required. On a two-port R&S ZNAxx, two internal sources are only available with option R&S ZNAxx-B52 Internal 2nd source and 2nd LO generator for 2-port R&S...
  • Page 239 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories R E F S O U R C E M E A S R E F S O U R C E M E A S O U T O U T O U T O U T Figure 4-22: Internal combiner...
  • Page 240 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories SO URCE MEAS SO URCE MEAS O U T O U T O U T O U T Figure 4-24: Direct access to both ports, coupler as combiner Intermodulation measurement results The intermodulation measurement provides two different types of results: ●...
  • Page 241 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories Intermodulation quantities A nonlinear DUT that is supplied with a two-tone signal with the lower/upper frequen- cies f and f causes emissions at frequencies which correspond to sums and differen- ces of the upper and lower tone frequencies and their integer multiples: –...
  • Page 242 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories + IMk / (k – 1) L, in The intermodulation suppression generally decreases with increasing stimulus power. The intercept point is equal to the lower tone power for which the intermodulation sup- pression would reach 0 dB.
  • Page 243 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories signal (from a local oscillator, LO) is applied to the RF mixer's LO port, resulting in an output signal at the mixer's Intermediate Frequency (IF) port. For a given RF signal, an ideal mixer would produce only two IF outputs: one at the frequency sum of the RF and LO (IF = RF + LO), and another at the frequency difference between the RF and LO (IF = |RF –...
  • Page 244 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories The figure above also shows the possible output frequencies of the two mixers. The actual values of f and f depend on the RF and LO frequencies and of the measured conversion (lower sideband or upper sideband with up- or down-conversion).
  • Page 245 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories – RF signal (left side): Analyzer port number (e.g. Port 1), frequency sweep range (or fixed frequency, if the LO signal is swept), CW power, frequency con- version settings (1 / 1 denotes no conversion). –...
  • Page 246 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories – RF signal (left side): Analyzer port number (e.g. Port 1), fixed power, CW fre- quency, frequency conversion settings (1 / 1 denotes no conversion). – LO signals (1 or 2, from below): Signal source (analyzer port or external gener- ator), fixed power, CW frequency, frequency conversion settings.

  • Page 247: Phase Coherent Source Control

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories Compared to conventional measurement methods, the mixer delay measurement offers several additional advantages: ● A network analyzer with standard functionality is sufficient. ● Easy calibration using a calibration mixer. ● PUOSM calibration (for high gain DUTs) ●...

  • Page 248: True Differential Mode

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories Defined coherence mode requires an analyzer with at least two independent internal sources. It is compatible with arbitrary single-ended or balanced port configurations. It can also be used for frequency conversion measurements. The source ports and the properties of the coherent signals are all defined in the "Source Coherence"...
  • Page 249 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories ters. A different behavior is expected for nonlinear balanced devices, where the trans- mission characteristics of the DUT may depend on how closely the stimulus signal matches real operating conditions. In true differential mode, a R&S ZNA with two or more internal sources generates true differential and common mode stimuli at arbitrary reference planes in the test setup and determines mixed-mode S-parameters, wave quantities and ratios.
  • Page 250 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories change the differential and common mode reference impedances, if they differ from the default settings. A subsequent source power calibration is recommended. You can also use Offset parameters and de-/embedding to move the reference plane where the analyzer provides an accurate differential or common mode signal.

  • Page 251: Pulsed Measurements

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.5.4 True differential mode with frequency converters If the frequency converter mode is combined with true differential mode, the analyzer generates a true differential or common mode stimulus signal at a calibrated reference plane which is located after two frequency converter ports.
  • Page 252 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories period, pulse rise and fall times, power drop across a pulse, and intrapulse phase mod- ulation, and produces a trend analysis over many pulses. The R&S ZNA can push pulse profile measurement data to a running R&S VSE instance for further (live!) analysis.

  • Page 253: Millimeter-Wave Converter Support

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories (see the related user manuals) 2. On the R&S ZNA a) prepare and run a "Pulse Profile" sweep b) create a trace for the b-wave to be measured c) set up and establish a VISA conncection to the target R&S VSE d) start pushing data to the target R&S VSE 4.7.7 Millimeter-wave converter support Option R&S ZNA-K8...
  • Page 254 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories GHz. The test ports of the frequency converters and the connecting elements are rec- tangular waveguides, whose dimensions are according to EIA WR-10, equivalent to RCSR WG-27. Refer to the Getting Started guide and the specifications supplied with your converter for detailed information about the frequency range and the waveguide type of your con- verter model.
  • Page 255 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories To this end, the RF output power is measured on a "leveling grid", i.e. at equidistant RF input power levels P and frequencies f . Two-dimensional interpolation is then RF-In, i used to obtain the appropriate input level for the desired output level at a given fre- quency.
  • Page 256 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories The sweep is performed at the frequency converter's maximum RF level, which is typically advantageous w.r.t. measurement time and accuracy at the power meter. For the subsequent steps, the correction factors c(f ) = P ) - P ) (on loga-...
  • Page 257 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories After you have finished the leveling procedure and have applied the scalar power cali- bration, the created leveling datasets are automatically activated. They can be disacti- vated or reactivated in the Leveling Datasets dialog.
  • Page 258 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories one-port and two-port calibration types supported by the network analyzer except for TNA. Refer to the documentation of the calibration kit for details. The R&S ZCxxx converters conform to standard IEEE 1785. The designation of their waveguide sizes is WM-xxx.

  • Page 259: Increased If Bandwidth 30 Mhz

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories To enable n-port converter measurements on an n-port R&S ZNA, you can use the connector at the rear panel of the R&S ZNA as common LO drive port. 4.7.8 Increased IF bandwidth 30 MHz Option R&S ZNA-K17 This software option increases the maximum measurement bandwidth (IF bandwidth) of a R&S ZNA from 1.5 MHz to 30 MHz.

  • Page 260: Noise Figure Measurement

    Software option R&S ZNA-K30 allows you to measure the noise figure of a 2-port DUT, operating in its linear range. Currently, this option is only available for R&S ZNA26 and R&S ZNA43. Noise figure (or noise factor, if the linear representation is chosen) is an important fig- ure of merit for system designers and eventually determines the overall system perfor- mance of a receiver.
  • Page 261 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories Based on this formulation the equation can be written in linear terms as: and S denote the signal power at the input and output of the DUT, respectively. and N represent the noise present at the input of the DUT and at the output of the DUT, respectively.
  • Page 262 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories Compared to calculations using noise factors (or noise figures), this method can easily account for different physical temperatures of the involved components. Furthermore, with noise temperatures there is no need to apply corrections factors, if the compo- nents are on a different temperature than the reference temperature T (= 290 K).
  • Page 263 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories present in the receiver. An additional step is required during calibration to characterize the noise of the receiver. For the receiver NF calibration, a well matched 50 Ω load connected to the receiving port and the noise power is measured.
  • Page 264 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories ● and T are the source and receiver noise temperature, respectively, deter- source mined during calibration ● is the measured gain of the DUT ● = 290 K is the reference temperature Frequency-converting DUTs Due to the existence of image (receive) bands, the noise figure of a frequency-convert- ing DUT is calculated slightly different than the noise figure of a non-frequency-con-...

  • Page 265: Measurement Uncertainty Analysis

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories additional measurements during calibration and measurement phase, the imperfect receiver response is corrected mathematically. 4.7.12 Measurement uncertainty analysis Option R&S ZNA-K50/R&S ZNA-K50P Measurement uncertainty analysis is available if option R&S ZNA-K50 and METAS VNA Tools (version 2.2.6 or higher) are installed on the instrument.
  • Page 266 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories Figure 4-31: S-parameter measurements with uncertainty bands Required input data for METAS VNA Tools: ● METAS VNA model (noise floor, trace noise, receiver linearity, drift) This model is provided by the analyzer firmware. ●...

  • Page 267: Security Write Protection

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories Required to calculate the calibrated S-parameters and their uncertainties. If rele- vant settings are changed on the VNA, these changes are also propagated to the METAS VNA Tools. ● Measured S-parameters (uncalibrated) The raw ("uncalibrated") data are handed over to the METAS VNA Tools after every sweep for real-time correction and uncertainty analysis.

  • Page 268: Eazy De-Embedding Based On Ieee 370

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories Figure 4-32: R&S ZNA-K51: system tray icon (SWP inactive) For standard Windows users, SWP is disabled. To enable it, right-click the system tray icon and select one of the available actions: For details see the R&S ZNA-K51 user manual that is installed with the software.
  • Page 269 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories Figure 4-33: Fixture modeling: EZD – Single Ended Ports dialog Figure 4-34: Fixture modeling: EZD – Balanced Ports dialog ● For general information about fixture de-embedding, see Chapter 4.6.2.9, "Fixture modeling and deembedding", on page 215.

  • Page 270: In-Situ De-Embedding

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.15 In-situ de-embedding Option R&S ZNA-K220 This option offers a pre-installed or service-retrofitted version of AtaiTec's In Situ De- Embedding (ISD) tool for fixture de-embedding. The tool is integrated into the de-embedding functionality of the analyzer firmware. ●...

  • Page 271: Delta-L 4.0 Pcb Characterization

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.17 Delta-L 4.0 PCB characterization Option R&S ZNA-K231 Delta-L is a de-embedding methodology developed by Intel Corporation and is used for de-embedding strip lines that include vias. Delta-L calculates the loss of PCB intercon- nects and can be performed on single-ended or balanced interconnects.

  • Page 272: Health And Usage Monitoring Service (Hums)

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.18 Health and usage monitoring service (HUMS) Option R&S ZNA-K980 The R&S ZNA comes with a health and utilization monitoring system (HUMS) providing information about the R&S ZNA. Aim is to increase the overall utilization, to avoid downtime and to increase the overall security level of a fleet of instruments.

  • Page 273: Internal 3Rd And 4Th Source For 4-Port R&S Zna

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.19 Internal 3rd and 4th source for 4-port R&S ZNA R&S ZNAxx-B3 A four-port R&S ZNA has at least two internal sources. With two internal sources (default), the physical ports of a four-port VNA are split into groups P1 = {1,2} and P2 = {3,4} such that source 1 can only drive ports in P1 and source 2 can only drive ports in P2.

  • Page 274: Internal 2Nd Source And 2Nd Lo Generator For 2-Port R&S Zna

    R&S ZNA. The frequency range of the LO generators (1st and 2nd) is 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz. ● This option is only available for R&S ZNA26 and R&S ZNA50. ● If the R&S ZNA is equipped with a second internal LO and an Out, then the second internal LO is connected to the LO Out.

  • Page 275: Lo Out

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories IF BW Time resolution Simultaneously measured wave quantities (MHz) (ns) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 0.15 ✓ ✓ ✓ with B7 with B7 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ with B7 with B7 ✓...

  • Page 276: Rffe Gpio Interface

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.25 RFFE GPIO interface Option R&S ZNA-B15 The trend in mobile radio communication is towards higher scale of integration of exter- nal components such as filters, switches, low noise and power amplifiers. The require- ment for test and measurement equipment is to make it possible to control those com- ponents directly from the instrument without the need of additional external tools, e.g.

  • Page 277: Direct Generator/Receiver Access

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories RFFE Cable with adapters (R&S ZN-Z25) A 2m ribbon cable for connecting a DUT to the RFFE GPIO interface – along with a set of adapters – is shipped with each RFFE GPIO extension board. It splits the 25-pin connector of the RFFE GPIO interface to four 10-pin socket connectors.

  • Page 278: Additional Removable System Drive

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories Figure 4-36: Standard vs. reverse coupler configuration Make sure not to overdrive the measurement receiver, when using the reversed cou- pler configuration. Its compression point is reduced by 10 to 20 dB, compared to the standard configuration.

  • Page 279: Receiver Step Attenuators

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.30 Receiver step attenuators Options R&S ZNAxx-B3y Receiver step attenuators are used to adjust the received signal levels to the input level range of the analyzer to avoid damage to the instrument, e.g. if the DUT is a power amplifier.
  • Page 280 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories noisy results, so it is recommended to use the monitor signal as the reference signal in this case. ● Option R&S ZNAxx-B161 provides direct access for port 1 of a R&S ZNAxx. ●...

  • Page 281: Internal Combiner

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories Port y = 1, 3 Source Step Meas Port y Source Meas Step Src Mon Out Figure 4-38: B16 jumpering for direct source monitoring ● Options R&S ZNAxx-B161/163 are only available with hardware option R&S ZNAxx-B16 (see Chapter 4.7.26, "Direct generator/receiver access",...

  • Page 282: Internal Low Noise Preamplifier

    To retrofit the internal combiner, the R&S ZNA must be sent to Rohde & Schwarz service. 4.7.35 Internal low noise preamplifier Hardware option R&S ZNA26-B302 | R&S ZNA43-B302 Hardware option R&S ZNAxx-B302 provides an internal low noise pre-amplifier (LNA) at receive port 2 of a R&S ZNAxx.

  • Page 283: Internal Low Power Spur Reduction Amplifier

    4.7.36 Internal low power spur reduction amplifier Hardware option R&S ZNA26-B501 | R&S ZNA43-B501 The purpose of option R&S ZNAxx-B501 is to lower the local oscillator (LO) leakage at port 1, which is required for properly measuring high gain DUTs (> 60 dB) or DUTs with low input compression.
  • Page 284 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories step attenuator, which can be freely set and therefore allowing to optimize the input compression and noise behavior at this measurement receiver. See Figure 4-42. ● The R&S ZNA must be equipped with a receiver step attenuator at port 1 (option R&S ZNAxx-B31) ●...

  • Page 285: Usb-To-Iec/Ieee Adapter

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories R&S®ZNA2x-B21: Source step att (0-70 dB/10 dB) Source R&S®ZNAxx-B161: Direct Source Monitor Access R&S®ZNAxx-B31: 10 dB Receiver step att (0-35 dB/5 dB) Meas. receiver Ref. receiver R&S®ZNAxx-B501: Low Power Spur Reduction 30 dB Figure 4-44: Internal Low Power Spur Reduction Amplifier with Direct Source Monitor Access (simpli- fied)
  • Page 286 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories USB ports Control connection (e.g. USB) Power meter / sensor ● Power calibration: An external power meter can measure the exact signal power at an arbitrary point in the test setup (reference plane) and thus provide the reference values for a power calibration.
  • Page 287 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.38.1 Zeroing Zeroing calibrates the external power meter by adjusting its reading at zero signal power. For this purpose, the RF cable between the analyzer and the power sensor must be disconnected (see tips below!). R&S power sensors and power meters auto- matically detect the presence of any significant input power.
  • Page 288 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories The power meter's sensor head is equipped with a WR10 waveguide connector, so depending on the frequency converter model a suitable WRxx to WR10 waveguide taper is required. For details concerning its usage, see the respective PMx manual that is available from the VDI Erickson power meter product pages (http://vadiodes.com/ index.php/en/products/power-meters-erickson).
  • Page 289 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories When configuring the PM4 in the External Power Meters dialog, the "Raw Serial" inter- face must be used, and the related COM port ("COM87" in our example) must be entered as "Address" parameter. Ranging For power meters PMx, setting the power range remotely is not supported by the R&S ZNA firmware.

  • Page 290: External Generators

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.39 External generators The connection of an external generator to the R&S ZNA can serve different purposes. ● Extended measurement functionality: Each external generator represents an addi- tional source port. External generators increase the number of RF input signals for the DUT.
  • Page 291 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories USB ports Control connection (e.g. USB) External generator External generators must be configured in the System – [Setup] softtool before they are available as additional sources. Configured generators appear in many control ele- ments of the R&S ZNA, e.g.

  • Page 292: Generic Devices

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories ● Use another device as master: Set the analyzer to "External" frequency reference and synchronize it (and all other devices) to the master's reference clock signal, fed in at the Reference In connector on the analyzer's rear panel. Fast sweep mode and conditions In list mode the external generator steps through a predefined list of frequencies or sig- nal powers.
  • Page 293 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories The firmware support of the R&S ZVAX-TRM extension unit is based on the generic devices functionality. A generic device's control interface is declared in one or more device configuration files, using the popular JavaScript Object Notation (*.json file format).

  • Page 294: External Dlls

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories Example: Generic Device Configuration "Header": "File Format": 1.0 "Device Identification": "Settling Time": 0.03 "Commands": { "Command Name": "MySetting1", "Command List": { "Command": "My:Device:Command 1" }, { "Command": "My:Device:Command 2" } { "Command Name": "MySetting2", "Command List": { "Command": "My:Device:Command 1"...
  • Page 295 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories ● as input values for math functions for the calculation of other traces To calculate a custom trace, the plug-in can make use of all data access points in the channel calculation chain. See Chapter 4.1.6.1, "Channel data flow", on page 93).

  • Page 296: Power Added Efficiency

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories The VNA firmware can abort the processing in the external DLL at any time, e.g. on a [Preset]. The DLL can handle certain trace types that must be uniquely named within the DLL. A naming scheme for traces allows the firmware (and hence the user) to request a partic- ular trace.
  • Page 297 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories The PAE measurement is based on the standard test setup for forward S-parameter measurements on a 2-port DUT. An additional measurement to determine the supplied power P is required. DC power measurement For the R&S ZNA an external power supply is required to measure P User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─...

  • Page 298: Gui Reference

    ® GUI reference R&S Function keys and softtools 5 GUI reference This chapter describes the Graphical User Interface (GUI) of the analyzer. The most convenient way to access the GUI functions is via Softtools. Hence the GUI reference is structured accordingly. The softtools, in turn, can be opened in the following ways: ●...
  • Page 299 ® GUI reference R&S Function keys and softtools Table 5-1: Function keys and softtools Function Key Keyboard Shortcut Related Softtool Action Trace – [Meas] Alt + Shift + A Meas softtool default Trace – [Format] Alt + Shift + B Format softtool default Trace –...

  • Page 300: Meas Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Function Key Keyboard Shortcut Related Softtool Action System – [Applic] Ctrl + N Applic softtool default System – [Display] Ctrl + S Display softtool default System – [Setup] Ctrl + T Setup softtool default System –...
  • Page 301 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Depending on the desired DUT and measurement, the measurement channel has to be prepared in a particular way. A dedicated multi-channel setup dialog guides you through the channel configuration (see Chapter 4.2.2.3, "Multi-channel setup dialog", on page 112).
  • Page 302 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool "Meas" softtool tab Channel Mode Required Software Option Power Sensor tab Spectrum tab Spectrum R&S ZNA-K1 External DLL tab Mixer Params (Frequency Converting DUTs) All frequency converting measurements require software option R&S ZNA-K4 (see Chapter 4.7.3, "Frequency conversion measurements", on page 234).

  • Page 303: S-Params Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool "Meas" softtool tab Channel Mode Required Software Option (in addition to R&S ZNA-K4) Intermodulation tab Intermodulation measure- mentsIntermodulation (frequency converting) Chapter 5.2.7, "Gain Compres- Converter compression sion tab", on page 346 Chapter 5.5.5, "Time Domain tab", Time domain analysis R&S ZNA-K2...
  • Page 304 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Setup Opens the S-Params setup dialog. S-Parameter (selector) Selects an S-parameters as a measured quantity for the active trace. Single-ended (unbalanced) S-parameters are referred to as S<out>< in>, where <out> and <in> denote the output and input logical port numbers, respectively. In presence of balanced ports, standard S-parameters are defined in the form S<m_out><m_in><out><in>, where output mode <m_out>...
  • Page 305 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool S<out><in> Selects one of the four elements of the standard 2-port S-parameters as a measured quantity for the active trace. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "S11" | "S12" | "S21" | "S22" CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "S11" | "S12" | "S21"...
  • Page 306 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool For background information, see Chapter 4.3.3.1, "Converted impedances", on page 127. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "Z-S11" | "Z-S12" | "Z-S12SER" | "Z-S12PAR" ... CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "Z-S11" | "Z-S12" | "Z-S12SER" | "Z-S12PAR" | ... Y <- S-Parameters ←...
  • Page 307 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "Y11" | "Z11" ... CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "Y11" | "Z11" ... Imbalance/CMRR ← Y/Z/k/μ-Parameters Allows you to select an imbalance or common mode rejection ratio (CMRR) parameter as measured quantity. These measurements are only available if at least one balanced port is active.
  • Page 308 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool A typical application of stability factors is to assess the stability of an amplifier. Stability factors cannot be calculated in balanced port configurations. For background informa- tion, see Chapter 4.3.7, "Stability factors", on page 139. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "KFAC21"...
  • Page 309 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Access: Trace – [Meas] > "S-Params" > "More S-Params..." S-Parameter "S-Parameter (selector)" on page 304. Detector Selects the algorithm that is used to calculate the results points from the raw measure- ment data. For details refer to Chapter 4.3.5.3, "Detector settings", on page 133.
  • Page 310 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool This dialog can only be opened, if a balanced and two single-ended logical ports are configured in the Balanced Ports dialog. ● The Logical Port on the left represents the balanced test port: any (active) bal- anced logical port can be selected ●...
  • Page 311 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "IMB<i>-<j><k>" | "IMB<j><k>-<i>" CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "IMB<i>-<j><k>" | "IMB<j><k>-<i>" 5.2.2.5 Balanced Ports dialog The "Balanced Ports" dialog allows you to enable/disable physical ports and to define logical ports (balanced or unbalanced) in the active channel. Access: Channel –...
  • Page 312 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool ● For a balanced port, two physical ports are combined to form a single logical port. ● For unused ports, the physical port is crossed out; no logical port number is assigned. Select Predefined Port Allows you to select from a set of predefined logical port configurations.
  • Page 313 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Physical Ports / Logical Ports Allows you to renumber logical ports. Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:LPORt<LogPt> SOURce<Ch>:LPORt<LogPt>:CLEar Define Physical to Logical Port Relation Allows you to define balanced, single-ended, and unused ports. In principle, it is possi- ble to combine any pair of two physical ports into a balanced port.
  • Page 314 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool For balanced ports, it is possible to define separate complex reference impedances for differential and for common mode. Single-ended Physical Port Logical Port (unbalanced) port ref, default connector Single- ended port Balanced port: Differential mode Balanced port Common mode...

  • Page 315: Wave Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:IMPedance:RNORmal 5.2.3 Wave tab Selects wave quantities as measured quantities. Background information Refer to Chapter 4.3.5, "Wave quantities and ratios", on page 131. 5.2.3.1 Controls on the Wave tab The "Setup" button opens the S-Params setup dialog.
  • Page 316 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool ● "a1 Source Port 1" is the wave transmitted at physical port 1. In a standard S- parameter measurement, this wave is fed to the input port (port 1) of the DUT (for- ward measurement). ●...
  • Page 317 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Background information Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 4.3.5.1, "Wave quantities", on page 131 ● Chapter 4.3.5.2, "Ratios", on page 132 The notation for wave quantities follows the usual scheme of the vector network ana- lyzer: ●...

  • Page 318: Ratio Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "A1" ... CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "A1" ... Use Generator as Source If checked, the "Generator" combo lists the configured external generators and the "Source Port" group of the Define section is disabled To configure external generators, use the "External Generators"...
  • Page 319 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool 5.2.4.1 Controls on the Ratio tab The "Setup" button opens the S-Params setup dialog. The "More Ratios..." button opens the More Ratios dialog which allows to select an arbitrary ratio of wave quantities. b<i> / a<j> Source Port <j> Selects predefined complex ratios of the standard 2-port wave quantities a...
  • Page 320 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool ● "b1/a2 Source Port 2" is the ratio of the wave quantities b and a and corresponds to the S-parameter S (reverse transmission coefficient). The analyzer can also measure arbitrary ratios for other source ports; see Chap- ter 5.2.4.2, "More Ratios dialog",...
  • Page 321 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool The notation for ratios follows the usual scheme of the vector network analyzer: ● The a-waves are the outgoing/transmitted waves at the analyzer's test ports. ● The b-waves are the incoming/measured waves. ● The source port for the stimulus signal must be specified in addition. ●...

  • Page 322: Noise Figure Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Port Allows you to select the source for the stimulus signal. ● "None", "Port <Pt>", or "Conv <Pt>", if Use Generator as Source is not checked ● "Gen <i>" if "Use Generator as Source" is checked Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "<Ratio>"...
  • Page 323 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Noise Figure (tool button) Opens the Noise figure setup dialog, which allows you to set up the NF measurement. Quick Setup Noise Figure (tool button) Opens the NF quickset dialog, which allows you to swiftly set up a NF measurement. The dialog provides guidance in terms of optimized measurement configuration and calculates the required measurement and calibration settings, such as source power and detector times.
  • Page 324 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure <TraceName>, 'NF1R' | 'NF2R' | ... CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine <TraceName>, 'NF1R' | 'NF2R' | ... 5.2.5.2 Noise figure setup dialog The NF "Setup" dialog is an instance of the Multi-channel setup dialog. It allows you to set up a noise figure (NF) measurement.
  • Page 325 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Figure 5-3: NF Setup dialog: frequency-converting Driving Port (RF) / Receiving Port (IF) Allows you to select the driving port (the RF port for frequency-converting DUTs) and the receiving port (the IF port) for the noise figure measurement. It is recommended to us a driving port which is equipped with a source step attenuator to suppress to inter-...
  • Page 326 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Cal Plane The power levels shown at the calibration plane are only valid after a source flatness calibration was performed. Ext Preamp Config In this dialog, different configurations using an external preamplifier can be set. Depending on the chosen configuration, only applicable calibration types are recom- mended.
  • Page 327 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Remote command: "Bandwidth" on page 485 Noise Det Meas Time For measuring the noise power, the root-mean-square (RMS) of each measurement sample is calculated. The noise detector measurement time sets the detector time at each measurement point for the detector, allowing to choose how many RMS val- ues are used at each frequency.
  • Page 328 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Figure 5-4: NF setup: Cal & Meas Overview dialog With all relevant settings displayed on one page, you can check if NF calibration and measurement are set up properly without browsing through various dialogs. Quickset Opens the NF quickset dialog...
  • Page 329 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool General > IF Frequency ← Advanced Settings For typical applications, the IF frequency is chosen automatically and depends on the chosen Noise Bandwidth and the measurement frequency. However, for certain mea- surements it can be preferable to choose a different IF frequency. The manually chosen IF frequency is applied over the full measurement frequency range.
  • Page 330 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Example 1: A broadband amplifier with a positive gain ranging from 500 MHz to 6 GHz typically requires sideband correction during a precise NF measurement. For such an amplifier, several higher-order sidebands of the VNA receiver are within its gain band- width.
  • Page 331 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Figure 5-5: NF Quickset dialog The dialog provides guidance in terms of optimized measurement configuration and calculates the required measurement and calibration settings, such as source power and detector times. Meas Settings The controls in the "Meas Settings" section allow you to enter the start and stop fre- quency of the NF measurement, and the...
  • Page 332 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Set the "Input Power" to a value in the linear region of the DUT. A good starting point is approximately 10 dB below the 0.1 dB input compression point of the DUT. Result Settings In the "Result Settings"...
  • Page 333 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Driving Port Allows you to evaluate the influence of the different front side receiver inputs and the "Preamp. Gain" on page 478 "b1" ("Isolation Amplifier") on the measurement time. Setting the "Receiver Input" and "Isolation Amplifier" here is equal to activating it in the "Input/Output tab"...

  • Page 334: Intermodulation Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool The detector times are calculated based on the VNA characteristics. They ensure that the selected trace noise is achieved over the intended frequency range, with minimum overall measurement time. Recommended Measurement and Calibration Settings This section gives an overview of the power settings the Quickset function recom- mends for an ideal calibration and measurement, without compression of the DUT or the VNA receivers.
  • Page 335 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool 5.2.6.1 Controls on the Intermodulation tab After a [Preset], most of the controls on the "Intermodulation" tab are disabled. They are enabled after the current channel has been set up for an intermodulation measure- ment (see "Intermod"...
  • Page 336 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine CW Mode Spectrum In CW spectrum mode, the intermodulation measurement is performed at fixed fre- quency of the lower tone ("CW Frequency") and the upper tone ("CW Frequency" + "Tone Distance"). The analyzer displays intermodulation products up to a selectable order ("IM Order") around the lower and upper tone frequencies.
  • Page 337 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool ● "Add CW Mode" Activates a new channel for the spectrum measurement. The "CW Frequency" plus half the "Tone Distance" defines the center of the diagram. ● "Spectrum = Marker" This button is only available if the analyzer is equipped with software option R&S ZNA-K1;...
  • Page 338 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Access: Trace – [Meas] ("Non-Frequency Converting") > "Intermodulation" > "Inter- mod." Figure 5-6: Intermodulation Setup Dialog (non-frequency converting DUT) Port and signal path setup The graphical part of the dialog allows you to define the related ports and the signal path.
  • Page 339 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Combiner Type ← Combiner Configuration Defines how the generated signals are combined. "External Use the signals of the test ports and combine them externally (see (Port)" graphic above). With this configuration, the two-tone signal is available at the output of the combiner.
  • Page 340 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool "Use Coupler This configuration does not require an external combiner, but pro- as Combiner" vides a reduced dynamic range. It combines the signals of the lower tone and upper tone sources using the directional coupler of the upper tone port as combiner: With this configuration, the two-tone signal is available at test port 1.
  • Page 341 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool "Receiver Input" on page 622. Receiving Port Selects the receiving port for the signal from the output of the DUT. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:IMODulation:RECeiver Sweep and stimulus setup IMD Sweep Type The intermodulation distortion measurement can be performed with three different sweep types.
  • Page 342 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:IMODulation:TDIStance Start delta Freq./Stop delta Freq./Number of Points/Base Power/CW Fre- quency/CW fixed to Defines the lower tone and upper tone frequency sweeps for IMD Sweep Type "Delta F". Additional channel settings IF Bandwidth "Bandwidth"...
  • Page 343 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Figure 5-7: Intermodulation Setup Dialog (frequency converting DUT) 5.2.6.4 Intermodulation Measurements dialog Allows you to select the measured quantities that are relevant for intermodulation mea- surements. Access: Trace – [Meas] > "Intermodulation" > "Intermod Product" | "Intercept Point" | "Main Tone"...
  • Page 344 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool IM<order><side>O Absolute InterModulation product (displayed in dB units). ● <order> defines the order of the intermodulation product. Possible values are 3, 5, 7, or 9. ● <side> defines the position of the intermodulation product relative to the lower and upper tones.
  • Page 345 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool IP<order><side><DUT port> Intercept Point at DUT output ● <order> defines the order of the intercept point. Possible values are 3, 5, 7, or 9. ● <side> defines the position of the intercept point relative to the lower and upper tones.

  • Page 346: Gain Compression Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool "Lower Tone at DUT Out" (LTO), "Lower Tone at DUT In" (LTI), "Upper Tone at DUT Out" (UTO), and "Upper Tone at DUT In" (UTI) are measurements of the two funda- mental waves of the intermodulation measurement. 5.2.7 Gain Compression tab Allows you to configure and perform compression point over frequency measurements.
  • Page 347 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Compression Point Power In / Compression Point Power Out / Compression Point S-Param Selects the input power, output power, or transmission S-parameter value at the <x dB> compression point as the measured quantity, where <x dB> is the specified Compression Value.
  • Page 348 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Figure 5-8: Amplifier Compression dialog Driving Port/Receiving Port Selects the driving and receiving port for the gain compression measurement. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:COMPression:SRCPort [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:COMPression:RECeiver Sweep Type Compression measurement channels are set up for linear frequency sweeps. For each point on the (linear) frequency grid, the firmware performs a power sweep.

  • Page 349: Time Domain Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Power Points Defines the number of points for the power sweeps at each point on the frequency grid defined using Start Frequency/Stop Frequency. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:COMPression:POWer:POINts 5.2.7.3 Converter Compression setup dialog Similar to the Amplifier Compression setup dialog, but with additional configuration possibilities for frequency converting DUTs.

  • Page 350: Power Sensor Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool 5.2.10 Power Sensor tab Allows you to set up and perform measurements using external power sensors. The standard test setup for a "Power Sensor" measurement involves one analyzer source port and a power sensor. The power sensor is connected to the VNA (e.g. to the analyzer's USB port) and provides scalar wave quantity results.

  • Page 351: Spectrum Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Source Port Selects one of the available test ports of the analyzer as a source of the stimulus sig- nal. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure 'TraceName', 'PmtrD1 | ... CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine 'TraceName', 'PmtrD1 | ... Show as Selects the physical unit of the displayed trace.
  • Page 352 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool 5.2.11.1 Controls on the Spectrum tab The controls on the "Spectrum" tab allow you to select a port and one of its receivers, and to define how the spectrum trace is calculated. The sweep parameters and other channel settings are defined in the Chapter 5.2.11.2, "Spectrum Setup dialog",...
  • Page 353 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure 'SA1' | 'SA1REF' | 'SA2' | 'SA2REF' ... CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine 'SA1' | 'SA1REF' | 'SA2' | 'SA2REF' ... Trace Mode Defines how the spectrum trace is smoothed and averaged. "Clear Write" Overwrite mode: the trace is overwritten by each sweep. "AVG"...
  • Page 354 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Average Calculates the arithmetic mean of all samples contained in a sweep point. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SPECtrum:DETector Image Rejection Selects the image rejection strategy: the higher the number of data acquisitions, the better the image rejection. "Off 1 acq."...

  • Page 355: External Dll Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Sweep Type / ... / Base Power Basic frequency sweep settings as defined in the Stimulus tab Sweep Params tab. In spectrum mode, the receiver is swept linearly. Resolution BW Sets the resolution bandwidth, see "Bandwidth"...
  • Page 356 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Measurement The "Measurement" section gives access to the custom traces of the loaded plug-ins. Each external DLL <ext_dll_name>.dll that provides at least one custom trace type, adds a measurement button "<ext_dll_name>" (with dotted left border) to the "Measurement"...
  • Page 357 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CDLL[:STATe] Permanent ← Loaded DLLs table Defines the task that is selected via Task Type and further defined via "Additional Input" on page 357 as permanent. A permanent task can interact with the firmware, even if it currently does not provide any traces, e.g.
  • Page 358 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool The firmware must be run as administrator to add or remove custom plugins. Once installed, standard user privileges are sufficient to use a plugin's functionality. Remote command: [SENSe:]CDLL:ADD [SENSe:]CDLL:REMove Configure Device Adress Opens an additional dialog that allows you to specify the addresses of external devices the external DLL requires to complete its tasks.
  • Page 359 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool 5.2.12.3 Power Added Efficiency (PAE) dialog The "Power Added Efficiency (PAE)" dialog configures the measurement of the PAE of an active 2-port device. PAE plugin ● The PAE measurement is preinstalled on instruments shipped with FW V2.15 or higher.
  • Page 360 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool A PAE measurement involves the following steps: 1. Enter the measurement parameters. 2. Establish the test setup (including the RF connections of the DUT and the DC INPUT connections) as shown in the circuit diagram. 3.
  • Page 361 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool In/Out Define the logical ports for the RF input and output signal, respectively. Remote command: "In" is specified as <Src Port> in the trace identifier (see "Define Trace" on page 361) "Out" is specified as "Additional Input" rport=<int value>; 5.2.12.4 Trace Definition Dialog Specifies a custom trace that is provided by an external DLL.

  • Page 362: Scalar Mixer Meas Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Additional Input For some task types, the basic information in "Define Trace" can be supplemented with "Additional Input". This string is processed by the external DLL, with DLL-specific syn- tax and semantics. If it is malformed or inappropriate for some reason, the firmware logs and displays the error messages that are returned by the DLL.
  • Page 363 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool ● The "Setup Frequency Converting DUT" button opens the Scalar Mixer Meas setup dialog that allows you to prepare one or more channels for Scalar mixer measure- ments. ● The "More ..." buttons open the Frequency Converting Measurements dialog that offers all available measurement parameters for scalar mixer measurements.
  • Page 364 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool In its upper part, the dialog shows a diagram with the RF and LO signals, the mixing product (IF), and the current frequency and power ranges for all signals. The diagram is adjusted according to the "2nd Mixer" selection; see "Two-stage mixer measure- ments"...
  • Page 365 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool The frequency-converting device is considered to be part of the mixer system under test (MUT). In the default configuration where the RF signal is swept and the LO sig- nals are at fixed frequency, the conversion factors do not modify the analyzer's source signals (RF, LO 1, LO 2).
  • Page 366 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool SOURce<Ch>:FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:PMFixed [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:TFRequency<Stg> [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:STAGes Activates the scalar mixer mode and closes the dialog. A "Mix" label in the channel list indicates that a scalar mixer measurement is active. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion 5.2.13.2 Frequency Converting Measurements dialog The "Frequency Converting Measurements"...
  • Page 367 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Figure 5-12: Frequency Converting Measurements dialog: vector mixer measurements Conversion Gain/Conversion Phase tab Conversion Gain tab (scalar/vector mixer measurements) Offers the full set of gain measurement parameters for frequency-converting DUTs. Conversion Phase tab (vector mixer measurements) Offers the full set of phase measurement parameters for frequency-converting DUTs.

  • Page 368: Vector Mixer Meas Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Converter Waves tab Offers the full set of wave parameters for frequency-converting DUTs. 5.2.14 Vector Mixer Meas tab Sets up the channel for phase measurements on a frequency converting DUT (a.k.a. vector mixer measurements), and lets you select the quantities to be measured. These measurements require software option R&S ZNA-K5.
  • Page 369 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool ● The "Setup Frequency Converting DUT" button opens the Vector Mixer Meas setup dialog that allows you to prepare one or more channels for Vector mixer measure- ments. ● The "More ..." buttons open the Frequency Converting Measurements dialog that offers all available measurement parameters for mixer measurements.

  • Page 370: Two Tone Group Dly Tab (Frequency-Converting Dut)

    ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool This dialog offers the same settings as the Scalar Mixer Meas setup dialog. However, for vector mixer measurements the LO ports must be controlled by the analyzer. 5.2.15 Two Tone Group Dly tab (frequency-converting DUT) Sets up the channel for a two-tone group delay measurement (a.k.a.
  • Page 371 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool 5.2.15.1 Controls on the Two Tone Group Dly tab Setup Frequency Converting DUT Opens the Two Tone Group Delay setup dialog. Measurement Allows you to select the quantities to be measured. The "Main Tone" button opens a dialog for quantity selection: User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─...
  • Page 372 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool 2 Tone Delta Freq. Allows you to select the frequency delta between upper tone and lower tone. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:MDELay:APERture Mixer Delay The controls in this section allow you to configure and perform a mixer delay calibra- tion.
  • Page 373 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Lower Tone Select the port that generates the lower tone of the two-tone signal. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:MDELay:LTONe Lower Tone Select the port that generates the upper tone of the two-tone signal. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:MDELay:UTONe Select the receive port for the two-tone group delay measurement.

  • Page 374: Format Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S Format softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:MDELay:CONVersion 5.3 Format softtool The "Format" softtool allows you to define how the measured data is presented in the diagram area. Access: Trace – [Format] Measured quantities and display formats The analyzer allows arbitrary combinations of display formats and measured quantities (see Chapter 5.2, "Meas softtool",...
  • Page 375 ® GUI reference R&S Format softtool Properties: The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis, scaled linearly. The magnitude of the complex quantity C, i.e. |C| = sqrt ( Re(C) + Im(C) ), appears on the vertical axis, scaled in dB. The decibel conversion is calculated according to dB Mag(C) = 20 * log(|C|) dB.
  • Page 376 ® GUI reference R&S Format softtool Polar Selects a polar diagram to display a complex quantity, primarily an S-parameter or ratio. Properties: The polar diagram shows the measured data (response values) in the complex plane with a horizontal real axis and a vertical imaginary axis. The magnitude of a complex value is determined by its distance from the center, its phase is given by the angle from the positive horizontal axis.
  • Page 377 ® GUI reference R&S Format softtool Properties: The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis, scaled linearly. The phase of the complex quantity C, i.e. φ (C) = arctan ( Im(C) / Re(C) ), appears on the vertical axis. φ (C) is measured relative to the phase at the start of the sweep (refer- ence phase = 0°).
  • Page 378 ® GUI reference R&S Format softtool Tip (alternative formats): It is possible to view the magnitude and phase of a complex quantity instead of the real and imaginary part. The magnitude can be displayed on a linear scale or on a logarithmic scale. Both the real and imaginary parts are displayed in the polar diagram.
  • Page 379 ® GUI reference R&S Format softtool Application: Transmission measurements, especially with the purpose of investigating deviations from linear phase response and phase distortions. To obtain the delay, a fre- quency sweep must be active. Tip: The cables between the analyzer test ports and the DUT introduce an unwanted delay, which often can be assumed to be constant.

  • Page 380: Scale Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S Scale softtool With n sweep steps the delay at sweep point no. m is calculated as follows: ● If n is even (n = 2k), then Δf (m) = f (m+k) – f (m–k) and ΔΦ(m) = ΔΦ (m+k) – ΔΦ (m–k).
  • Page 381 ® GUI reference R&S Scale softtool The "Scale Values" settings are closely related to the "Format" and "Display" settings. The "Scale Values" settings depend on the current trace format (diagram type) because not all diagrams can be scaled in the same way: ●...
  • Page 382 ® GUI reference R&S Scale softtool Alternatives to Scaling There are several alternatives to manual trace/diagram scaling. Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 3.3.7, "Scaling diagrams", on page 70 ● Chapter 3.3.3, "Touchscreen gestures", on page 58 (zoom stimulus via spreading and pinching) ●...

  • Page 383: Scale Coupling Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Scale softtool Ref Value Sets the reference line of a Cartesian diagram or the outer circumference of a circular diagram. ● In Cartesian diagrams "Ref Value" defines the value of the reference line, indicated by an arrowhead symbol at the right edge of the diagram area. The color of the symbol corresponds to the trace color.

  • Page 384: Zoom Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Scale softtool Related settings Refer to Chapter 5.5.1.3, "Trace Manager dialog", on page 390. The "Trace Manager..." button opens the Trace Manager dialog. Couple All Traces / Couple Trc ... To Trace Applies the scale settings of the reference trace ("To Trace") to all traces / to the active trace.
  • Page 385 ® GUI reference R&S Scale softtool Alternatives to Zooming There are several alternatives to graphical/numerical zooming. Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 3.3.7, "Scaling diagrams", on page 70 ● Chapter 5.4.1, "Scale Values tab", on page 380 ● Chapter 3.3.3, "Touchscreen gestures", on page 58 (zoom stimulus via spreading and pinching)

  • Page 386: Traces Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool You can define the zoom area using touchscreen or mouse. To modify the zoom win- dow in graphical zoom mode, you can also use the numerical input fields "Max", "Min", "Start", and "Stop". Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:ZOOM[:STATe] Zoom Reset If a...
  • Page 387 ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool Related information Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 4.1.3, "Traces, channels and diagrams", on page 85 ● Chapter 3.3.5, "Handling diagrams, traces, and markers", on page 62 In remote control, each channel can contain an active trace. The active remote traces and the active manual trace are independent of each other;...
  • Page 388 ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool The new trace is created with the settings of the former active trace, but displayed in another color. The former and the new active trace overlay each other. Change the ref- erence position or select a different measurement for the new trace to separate them (see Chapter 5.2, "Meas softtool",...
  • Page 389 ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool ● These actions can also be performed from the context menu of the trace name segment in the trace list (see Chapter 4.2.1.4, "Channel list and channel settings", on page 107). ● Use the "On" flags in the "Trace Manager" to show/hide arbitrary sets of traces (see Chapter 5.5.1.3, "Trace Manager dialog",...
  • Page 390 ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool ● Frequency Converting Measurements: see Chapter 5.2.13.2, "Frequency Convert- ing Measurements dialog", on page 366 ● Two Tone Group Delay Measurements: see "Measurement" on page 371 5.5.1.3 Trace Manager dialog The "Trace Manager" dialog allows you to perform operations on traces. Access: Trace –...
  • Page 391 ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool ● "Diagram" indicates and controls the diagram area to which the related trace is assigned. ● "Scale" indicates and controls the scale coupling of the related trace. A trace's scaling can either be uncoupled ("Scale" empty) or coupled to another trace's scaling.

  • Page 392: Mem Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool Couple All Channels / Decouple All Channels ● "Couple All Channels" assigns all traces to the channel of the active trace, deleting all other (now unused) channels. The analyzer displays a confirmation dialog box before deleting the unused channels.
  • Page 393 ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool New memory traces are named "Mem<n>[<Data Trace>]", where: ● <n> counts all data and memory traces in the active recall set in chronological order ● <Data_Trace> is the name of the associated data trace Trace names can be changed in the Trace Manager dialog.

  • Page 394: All Mem All Data Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool The trace functions comprise the following mathematical operations: ● Active trace math on unformatted and formatted traces, as configured in the Chap- ter 5.5.4, "Math tab", on page 396. ● A shift of the data trace (see "Shift Trace"...
  • Page 395 ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool All Data to <Destination> Stores the current data of all data traces in the active recall set to memory traces, in accordance with the Destination setting. No trace functions are applied to the stored traces.

  • Page 396: Math Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool New memory traces are named "Mem<n>[<Data_Trace>]" with <n> selected by the analyzer firmware to make trace names unique. Remote command: Show All Data / Hide All Data / Show All Mem / Hide All Mem Displays or hides all data or memory traces in the active recall set.
  • Page 397 ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool 5.5.4.1 Controls on the Math tab The "Define Math..." buttons in the "Complex Data" and "Formatted Data" sections both open the User Def Math dialog, but with different scope: ● "Complex Data" > "Define Math..." defines mathematical operations on raw com- plex trace data.
  • Page 398 ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool Trace Math ← Complex Data/Formatted Data Activates the mathematical mode, applying the last active mathematical relation to the active trace. The trace is replaced by the mathematical trace and Math is displayed in the trace list while the mathematical mode is active: "Trace Math"...
  • Page 399 ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool Access: Trace – [Trace Config] > Math > Complex Data/Formatted Data section > "Define Math..." Depending on the section from where the dialog is opened, the calculation is either based on unformatted or formatted trace data. Compatibility between traces in mathematical relations Mathematical traces are either constant functions or functions of one or more data or memory traces.
  • Page 400 ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool Expression builder The mathematical expression appears in the upper part of the dialog. The operands and operators in the expression can be selected from a keyboard and the list of "Oper- ands": ● The keyboard supports the entry of numeric values, constants, and mathematical functions.
  • Page 401 ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool *) The operand "StimVal" can be used for all sweep types. Please note that – as with all user math operands – only the numerical value without unit is processed in the user math formula. ●...

  • Page 402: Time Domain Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool Example: A mathematical trace value amounts to 1 (real value); the port impedance is 50 Ω. If "Result is Wave Quantity" is on, the analyzer assumes the trace value to be 1 V, which is converted into a linear power of 20 mW, corresponding to approx.
  • Page 403 ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool "Low Pass Settings..." opens the Low Pass Settings dialog. Time Domain Selects the time domain representation for the active diagram area. The softkey is enabled if a linear frequency sweep is active (see "Lin Freq" on page 492).
  • Page 404 ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool Type Selects a band pass or low pass time domain transform. See Chapter 4.7.2.2, "Band pass and low pass mode", on page 221. To calculate a low pass transform, the sweep points must be on a harmonic grid. Oth- erwise the analyzer can only calculate an approximate result and generates a warning.
  • Page 405 ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool Resolution Enh. Broadens the frequency range that the analyzer considers for the time domain trans- form by a linear factor. A factor of 1 means that the original sweep range and the mea- sured sweep points are used; no additional assumptions are made. With higher resolu- tion enhancement factors, the measurement data is extrapolated using a linear predic- tion method.
  • Page 406 ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool Is the Current Grid Harmonic? The area at the top of the "Low Pass Settings" dialog indicates whether the current fre- quency grid is harmonic. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]HARMonic? Set Harmonic Grid and Keep The three buttons provide alternative algorithms for calculation of a harmonic grid, based on the current sweep points.

  • Page 407: Time Gate Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool Automatic Harmonic Grid If enabled (default) the frequency grid is automatically kept harmonic. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]HARMonic:AUTO DC Value The control elements in this section define the measurement result at zero frequency and in the interpolation/extrapolation range between f = 0 and f = f .
  • Page 408 ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool you can use the time gate settings to eliminate unwanted responses in your signal. After switching back to the frequency domain, you will receive the frequency response of your DUT without the contribution of the unwanted responses. The time gate is inde- pendent of the frequency window used to filter the trace before transforming it to time domain.

  • Page 409: Distance To Fault Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:CENTer CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:SPAN CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STARt CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STOP Show Range Lines Displays or hides two red lines indicating the start and stop of the time gate in a time domain diagram. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:SHOW Bandpass / Notch The filter type defines what happens to the data in the specific time region.

  • Page 410: Trace Statistics Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool 5.5.8 Trace Statistics tab Evaluates statistical and phase information of the entire trace or of a specific evalua- tion range and calculates the x-dB compression point. 5.5.8.1 Controls on the Trace Statistics tab The "Evaluation Range..." button opens the "Evaluation Range" dialog (see Chap- ter 5.5.8.2, "Evaluation Range dialog",...
  • Page 411 ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool Suppose that the trace in the evaluation range contains n stimulus values x and n cor- responding response values y (measurement points). The statistical values are obtained as follows: ● "Min" and "Max" are the largest and the smallest of all response values y ●...
  • Page 412 ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool Phase/El Length Displays or hides the phase delay ("Phs Dly") and the electrical length ("El Len") of the trace in the selected evaluation range ("Evaluation Range..."). The parameters are only available for trace formats that contain phase information, i.e. for the formats "Phase", "Unwr Phase", and the polar diagram formats "Polar", "Smith", "Inv Smith"...
  • Page 413 ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool the straight line between points A and B. The flatness is the difference between the largest and the smallest response value of this difference trace. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:SFLatness[:STATe] CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:RESult? CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics[:STATe] CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics[:STATe]:AREA Power Ratio Activates the noise power ratio statistics for spectrum traces. This checkbox is only available if the spectrum analysis option R&S ZNA-K1 is instal-...
  • Page 414 ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool ● "Cmp In" is the stimulus level at the compression point in units of dBm. "Cmp In" always corresponds to the driving port level (e.g. the level from port no. j, if a trans- mission parameter S is measured).
  • Page 415 ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool Ref. Range This button is visible if either: ● Compression point statistics are calculated and "Range" is used as Reference Value ● The current channel is in spectrum analysis mode It opens the "Reference Range" dialog that allows you to configure the sweep range whose average value shall be used as the reference ("small signal value") for the com- pression point calculation or as the reference power for the Power Ratio...

  • Page 416: Smooth Shift Hold Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool Access: ● Trace – [Trace Config] > "Trace Statistics" > "Evaluation Range..." ● Channel – [Offset Embed] > "Offset" > "Evaluation Range..." ● Evaluation Range Selects a predefined evaluation range. Up to 10 different ranges are available for each recall set.
  • Page 417 ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool ● The analyzer can export the raw complex (unformatted) data or formatted data. The unformatted data are independent of all "Smooth Shift Hold" settings; see "Formatted Values" on page 426. ● For complex traces, if marker format and trace format do not coincide, the marker values are calculated before Smoothing Hold...
  • Page 418 ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool Tip: The sweep average is an alternative method of compensating for random effects on the trace by averaging consecutive traces. Compared to smoothing, the sweep average requires a longer measurement time but does not have the drawback of aver- aging out quick variations of the measured values.
  • Page 419 ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool The "Hold" process can be restarted any time using "Restart" (current trace) or "Restart All" (all traces in the active recall set). The "Hold" process is also restarted automatically when the channel or trace settings are changed so that the previous measurement results are no longer compatible.

  • Page 420: Infinite Averaging Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool Shift Reset Resets the static shifting, defined using Stimulus Mag / Phase / Real / Imag, respectively. Tracking Mode/Ref Sweep Point Allows you to take the trace value at a selected sweep point as the reference point for a dynamic shift of the active trace.

  • Page 421: Trace Data Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool "Magnitude - Perform averaging of magnitude and phase (default) of the complex Phase" trace value. Perform averaging of the real and imaginary part of the complex trace Real - Imag value (i.e. over the complex value itself). Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:IAVerage:MODE 5.5.11 Trace Data tab...
  • Page 422 ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool 5.5.11.1 Import Complex Data dialog The "Import Complex Data" dialog loads a memory trace from a trace file. Trace files are ASCII files with selectable file format. The loaded trace data is used to generate a memory trace which is coupled to the active data trace.
  • Page 423 ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool 5.5.11.2 Export Data - <File Type> dialog The "Export Data - <File Type>" dialog stores data or memory traces to a trace file. Trace files are ASCII files with selectable file format. Access: ● Trace –...
  • Page 424 ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool Figure 5-14: ASCII Trace files export The "Export Data - <File Type>" dialog is a standard "Save File" dialog with several additional buttons to specify the export options. Many options depend on the selected export file format ("Files of type").
  • Page 425 ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool Normalize with Port-Specific Impedances For Touchstone file export only. If checked, the firmware renormalizes the exported S- parameters according to the port-specific reference impedances instead of a common target impedance of 50 Ω (see "Renormalization of S-parameters"...
  • Page 426 ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool Formatted Values For ASCII (*.csv) or Matlab (*.dat) files only: Selects the format for the exported trace data. ● Check box cleared (off): Export the raw complex (unformatted) measurement val- ues, represented by the real and imaginary parts, the linear magnitude and phase, or dB magnitude and phase.
  • Page 427 ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool Comment Added to File Defines a comment to be added to the exported trace data file. If empty (←"Delete"), no comment is added. Remote command: MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:OPTion:COMMent 5.5.11.3 Select Parameter dialog The "Select Parameter" dialog provides a selection of measurement results (e.g. S- parameters) or traces, e.g.
  • Page 428 ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool Checks and Messages in the Dialog After each port or channel selection, the R&S ZNA checks the channel data for com- patibility with the trace export conditions. If data from "All Channels" are exported, every channel must contain a compatible set of traces;...

  • Page 429: Linearity Deviation Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Traces softtool 5.5.12 Linearity Deviation tab Allows you to set up and activate a linearity deviation view for the active trace. Instead of the trace itself, the linearity deviation view displays the deviation of the trace values from a linear function of the current sweep variable sv: LinDev_Tr(sv) = Tr(sv) –...

  • Page 430: Lines Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool Tracking Similar to Auto Linearity Deviation but recalculates Constant Slope for every sweep. This checkbox is only enabled if linearity deviation is turned On. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LDEViation:MODE Slope Slope of the linear function to which the trace is compared. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LDEViation:SLOPe El.

  • Page 431: Limit Test Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool Background information Refer to Chapter 4.4.1, "Limit check", on page 141. 5.6.1 Limit Test tab Defines limit lines for the measurement results (upper and lower limits), visualizes them in the diagrams and activates/deactivates the limit check. Limit lines are available for all cartesian diagram types;...
  • Page 432 ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool The limit line colors are defined in the Define User Color Scheme dialog (System > [Display] > "Config" > "Define User Color..."). You can choose between various options: ● Display upper and lower limit lines with different colors. ●...
  • Page 433 ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool Note: ● Limit check and display of limit lines are independent of each other: – The limit lines can be displayed, no matter if the limit check is enabled. – If "Limit Check" is enabled, the limits are checked, no matter if the limit lines are displayed.
  • Page 434 ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool Global Check Activates or deactivates the global limit check including upper/lower limits and ripple limits. The global limit check is a composite limit check over all traces of the current recall set. The result of the global check appears in a popup box whenever "Global Check"...
  • Page 435 ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool If both Trc1 and Trc2 fail, the quality is poor. Instead of using two traces, it is possible to consider two groups of traces that are assigned to "TTL1 Pass" and "TTL2 Pass", respectively. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:TTLout<Pt>[:STATe] Shift Lines...
  • Page 436 ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool Controls on the Define Limit Lines dialog The "Define Limit Lines" dialog contains a table to edit the individual segments of the limit lines. The buttons below the table extend or shorten the segment list. Creating limit lines with minimum effort Choose one of the following methods to create and handle limit lines efficiently: ●...
  • Page 437 ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool Add / Insert / Delete / Delete All The first four buttons below the segment list extend or shorten the list. The analyzer places no restriction on the number of segments in a limit line. ●...
  • Page 438 ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool The active trace must be cartesian and the "Format" of the imported trace must be the same as the "Format" of the active trace. ● "Import File..." opens a dialog to load a limit line from a trace file (see Chap- ter 5.5.11, "Trace Data tab",...

  • Page 439: Ripple Test Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool Response dialog The "Response" dialog allows you to configure the limit line segment in detail. Access: Define Limit Lines dialog > "Response" cells For convenience, "Type", "Start Stimulus", "Stop Stimulus", and "Interpolation" are repeated from the Segment List of the "Define Limit Lines"...
  • Page 440 ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool 5.6.2.1 Controls on the Ripple Test tab The "Def. Ripple Test..." button opens the "Define Ripple Test" dialog (see Chap- ter 5.6.2.2, "Define Ripple Test dialog", on page 442). Show Ripple Limits Shows or hides the ripple limit lines associated with the active trace in a Cartesian dia- gram area.
  • Page 441 ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool When the limit check is switched on, a movable info field shows the pass/fail informa- tion and the measured ripple in each ripple limit range. If the ripple limit check fails at a measurement point, the point is marked with a colored square. The "Limit Fail Trace Color"...
  • Page 442 ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool Show Results All Traces Defines the visibility of ripple info fields in the active recall set. ● If disabled, only the ripple info field of the active trace is displayed (in case it has ripple check enabled).
  • Page 443 ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool The "Define Ripple Test" dialog contains a table to edit the individual ranges of the rip- ple check ranges. The buttons below the table extend, shorten, or reorder the range list and save/recall ripple test data. Range List Defines the individual ripple limit ranges.

  • Page 444: Circle Test Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool value of the range before the active range to the "Start Stimulus" value of the active range. Its ripple limit is estimated according to the measured ripple of the trace in the created range. The range numbers in the list are adapted. If no range is active, "Insert"...
  • Page 445 ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool Show Limit Circle Shows or hides the limit line associated with the active trace in a polar diagram area. The limit line colors are defined in the "Define User Color Scheme" dialog (see Chap- ter 5.18.3.2, "Define User Color Scheme dialog", on page 778).
  • Page 446 ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CIRCle:DISPlay[:STATe] Limit Check Switches the limit check of the active trace on or off. When the limit check is switched on, a movable "PASS" or "FAIL" message is dis- played in the diagram. If the limit check fails at a measurement point, the point is marked with a colored square.
  • Page 447 ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool Figure 5-16: Simultaneous dB Mag limit line and circle check Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CIRCle[:STATe] CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CIRCle:FAIL? CALCulate:LIMit:CIRCle:FAIL:ALL? Limit Fail Beep Activates or deactivates the fail beep. The fail beep is a low-tone acoustic signal that is generated each time the analyzer detects an exceeded limit.

  • Page 448: Display Circle Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CIRCle:DATA Global Check "Global Check" on page 434. TTL1 Pass / TTL2 Pass "TTL1 Pass / TTL2 Pass" on page 434. 5.6.4 Display Circle tab The "Display Circle" functionality allows you to limit results in complex trace formats (Smith, Polar) to a user-defined circle.

  • Page 449: Horiz. Line Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool left ("FAIL") = "Circle Test" enabled, but not limited to "Display Circle" right ("PASS") = "Circle Test" enabled, but limited to "Display Circle" Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DCIRcle[:STATe] Clear Circle Resets the "Display Circle" to its default configuration (unit circle; show border: off; limit to circle: off) Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DCIRcle:CLEar...

  • Page 450: Marker Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool Show Horiz. Line Displays or hides the horizontal line. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:DLINe:STATe Response Value Defines/shows the response value of the horizontal line. Tip: Use the R&S ZNA's drag and drop functionality to move the horizontal line to a particular position.
  • Page 451 ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool Mkr <i> Stimulus / Ref Mkr Stimulus Gets/sets the stimulus value of the active marker. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:X CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:X Mkr <i> Arb. Response / Ref Mkr Arb. Response Gets/sets the response value (Y position) of an "Arbitrary" marker (see "Marker Mode"...
  • Page 452 ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool Markers remember their "Marker Props" while disabled (see Chapter 5.7.2, "Marker Props tab", on page 453). The marker properties are definitely lost when the associ- ated trace is deleted. Tip: To disable a single marker, drag it into vertical direction to release it from the trace and drop it onto the "Delete"...

  • Page 453: Marker Props Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool Coupled Markers Activates or deactivates Marker coupling. The label indicates the selected Coupling Type: "Coupling Type" Label "All" "Coupled Markers" "Channel" "Coupled Markers in <name of active channel>" "Diagram" "Coupled Markers in <name of active diagram>" Coupling also works if Tracking is enabled for Marker <m>...
  • Page 454 ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool Marker Format Defines the formatting of the active marker in the movable marker info field. For background information on marker formats, see "Marker format" on page 103. "Default" means that the marker is formatted according to the related trace's Dflt Marker Frmt In "Arbitrary"...
  • Page 455 ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool The marker can be moved freely inside the diagram, directly adjusting its X and Y coor- dinates. If in the current trace format the X axis represents the stimulus, the marker's stimulus value is adjusted accordingly. Otherwise the marker's stimulus value remains unchanged and is not shown in the Marker info field.

  • Page 456: Marker Search Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool 5.7.3 Marker Search tab Provides "Marker Search" functions that move the active marker to a (local) maximum or minimum of the active trace. The search operation can be restricted to a configurable range of stimulus values ("Search Range...").
  • Page 457 ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute MINimum | MAXimum CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:RESult? Center = Marker "Center = Marker / Start = Marker / Stop = Marker / Span = Marker" on page 470. Next Peak Sets the active marker to the next local maximum or minimum in the search range, depending on the selected Peak Type.
  • Page 458 ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool Define an adequate "Search Range" to restrict the search to the adequate frequency or power interval (see Chapter 5.7.3.2, "Search Range dialog", on page 458). Note: Tracking for bandfilter search can be activated separately, see "Tracking"...
  • Page 459 ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool It is possible to define search ranges for each recall set and assign them to the corre- sponding markers and the reference marker. Select Marker Selects the reference marker or one of the numbered markers that can be assigned to the trace.
  • Page 460 ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool Note: The marker Search Ranges are identical to the evaluation ranges for trace sta- tistics. For more information, see Chapter 5.5.8.2, "Evaluation Range dialog", on page 415. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER[:RANGe] CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER:STARt CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER:STOP Range Limit Lines On Displays or hides the range limit lines in the diagram area.
  • Page 461 ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool Select Marker Allows you to select the related marker and to activate or deactivate it. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] Search Config Allows you to select the Target Search Mode of the selected marker. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute Threshold Settings Defines a threshold for (single) peak searches and activates it.

  • Page 462: Multiple Peak Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool 5.7.4 Multiple Peak tab "Multiple Peak" search allows you to find multiple local minima/maxima at once. Background information Refer to "Basic marker search functions" on page 105. 5.7.4.1 Controls on the Multiple Peak tab Max / Min Sets up to 10 markers to the highest maxima or lowest minima in the configured Eval...
  • Page 463 ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool All Markers Off "All Off" on page 451. 5.7.4.2 Multiple Marker Config dialog The "Multiple Marker Config" dialog allows you to configure the multiple peak searches for the active trace. Access: Trace – [Marker] > "Multiple Peak" > "Marker Config..." Search Config Same as selecting Max /...

  • Page 464: Target Search Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool 5.7.5 Target Search tab The "Target Search" functions use markers to locate trace points with a specific response value ("Target Value"). The functions are unavailable if the active trace con- tains no markers (e.g. after "All Markers Off"). Some of the "Target Search"...
  • Page 465 ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool Target Format Description Formula "Phase unwrap" Unwrapped phase of z comprising Ф(z) = φ (z) + 2k·360° the complete number of 360° phase rotations [°] "Real" Real part of z Re(z) = x "Imag" Imaginary part of z Im(z) = y "SWR"...

  • Page 466: Bandfilter Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool 5.7.6 Bandfilter tab "Bandfilter" search allows you to search for trace segments with a bandpass or band- stop shape, and determine characteristic filter parameters. Background information Refer to "Bandfilter search" on page 106. Bandfilter for arbitrary scalar traces "Bandfilter"...
  • Page 467 ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:BWIDth Bandpass Ref to Max Activates the search for a bandpass region on the active trace and activates Tracking. The located bandpass region is the tallest peak in the search range with a minimum excursion as specified by the "Bandwidth"...
  • Page 468 ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:BWIDth:MODE BPASs CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute BFILter CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:SEARch:BFILter:RESult[:STATe]:AREA Bandpass Ref to Mkr Activates the search for a bandpass region on the active trace and activates Tracking, starting at the position of the active marker. A bandpass region is the closest peak in the evaluation range that has a minimum excursion as specified by the "Bandwidth"...
  • Page 469 ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:BWIDth:MODE BSTop CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute BFILter Result Off Hides the movable info field with the results of a bandpass or a bandstop search and disables Tracking. The info field is displayed again (and tracking re-enabled) when a new "Bandfilter"...

  • Page 470: Set By Marker Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool 5.7.7 Set by Marker tab The "Set by Marker" functions use the active marker to define the sweep range, scale the diagram and introduce an electrical length offset. The functions are unavailable if the active trace contains no markers (e.g. after "All Markers Off"). Examples Refer to Chapter 3.3.7.6, "Set by...

  • Page 471: Info Field Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool Ref Val = Marker / Max = Marker / Min = Marker The following functions use the response value of the active marker to scale the y-axis of the diagram: ● "Ref Val = Marker" sets the reference value equal to the response value of the active marker, leaving the values of the vertical divisions ("Scale / Div") unchanged.

  • Page 472: Marker Coupling Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool 5.7.9 Marker Coupling tab Allows you to set up and control marker coupling. Background information Refer to "Marker coupling" on page 105. Coupled Markers Activates or deactivates Marker coupling. The label indicates the selected Coupling Type: "Coupling Type"...

  • Page 473: Stimulus Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S Stimulus softtool Remote command: CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled:TYPE Reset Marker Coupling Convenience function for disabling marker coupling and setting the Coupling Type "All" (default). Remote command: CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled[:STATe] OFF CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled:TYPE ALL 5.8 Stimulus softtool On the "Stimulus" softtool, you can access to the stimulus parameters of the active channel.
  • Page 474 ® GUI reference R&S Stimulus softtool The following "Stimulus" settings are also available on the "Power" tab: ● Power ● Start Power / Stop Power Start Frequency / Stop Frequency / Center Frequency / Span Frequency Defines the sweep range for non-segmented frequency sweeps. For a Lin Freq sweep, setting "Start Frequency"...
  • Page 475 ® GUI reference R&S Stimulus softtool Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:STARt SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:STOP Number of Points Sets the total number of measurement points for CW Mode sweeps. This value can also be set on the "Sweep Params" tab of the "Sweep"softtool (see "Number of Points" on page 489).

  • Page 476: Power Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Stimulus softtool The lists include external generator and power meter ports. The "Frequency" list is dis- abled while the frequency conversion is switched off. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:AXIS:FREQuency [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:AXIS:POWer 5.8.2 Power tab The "Power" tab provides settings related to transmit and receive power. It is also dis- played on the "Pwr Bw Avg"...
  • Page 477 ® GUI reference R&S Stimulus softtool Power Determines the output power at the test ports for the sweep types "Lin Freq", "Log Freq", "CW Mode", and "Time". Also determines the default output power for "Segmen- ted" sweeps, where the output power can be set per segment. The setting has no effect for Power sweeps, where the source power is varied over a...
  • Page 478 ® GUI reference R&S Stimulus softtool Attenuation factors are port- and channel-specific. Possible values are 0 dB to 35 dB in steps of 5 dB. The analyzer rounds any entered value below the maximum attenuation to the closest step. Note: Receiver step attenuators are optional hardware (see Chapter 4.7.30, "Receiver step attenuators",...
  • Page 479 ® GUI reference R&S Stimulus softtool Initially, the "ALC Config" dialog only displays basic settings. For full details, enable Show Advanced Settings. ALC On Enables/disables automatic level control (ALC) for the current channel. If mm-wave converters are involved in the setup, the VNA firmware checks whether suitable leveling data are active.
  • Page 480 ® GUI reference R&S Stimulus softtool Possible Port Power Limits are ignored while the ALC loop is active. Therefore, to pro- tect sensitive DUTs from excess input levels, a narrower control range (smaller value) can be required. A warning in the lower left corner of the "ALC Config" dialog points out the potential hazard.
  • Page 481 ® GUI reference R&S Stimulus softtool Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer<Pt>:ALC:COUPle Apply Wave Correction "Wave Correction" on page 316. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EWAVe[:STATe] Settling Tolerance Defines the maximum variation of the source signal level after the ALC has settled. The "Settling Tolerance" has an impact on the ALC Path IF Bandwidth in "Auto"...

  • Page 482: Time Domain X-Axis Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Stimulus softtool If the Control Loop Parameters are determined automatically, then the "ALC Path IF Bandwidth" also affects the resulting "Control Loop Parameters". Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer:ALC:AUBW SOURce<Ch>:POWer:ALC:BANDwidth Control Loop Parameters ← Show Advanced Settings Defines the tuning coefficients of the proportional-integral (PI) controller the analyzer uses as a feedback controller for ALC;...
  • Page 483 ® GUI reference R&S Stimulus softtool Figure 5-17: Stimulus > Time Domain X-Axis softtool tab left = Time representation right = Distance representation Time Start / Time Stop / Time Center / Time Span Defines the display range for the time domain trace in time representation (see "...

  • Page 484: Pwr Bw Avg Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S Pwr Bw Avg softtool Remote command: n.a. "Time Start / Time Stop / Time Center / Time Span" on page 483. Time / Distance "Time" and "Distance" switch over between the x-axis scaling in time units or distance units.
  • Page 485 ® GUI reference R&S Pwr Bw Avg softtool Optimizing the filter settings A small bandwidth and a high selectivity of the digital IF filter suppress the noise level around the measurement frequency, and thus increase the dynamic range. However, the measurement time increases with smaller filter bandwidths and high selectivity. For small bandwidths, the filter settling time, which is inversely proportional to the band- width, is responsible for the predominant part of the measurement time.

  • Page 486: Average Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Pwr Bw Avg softtool IF Filter (analog) Selects the analog IF signal path. "Normal" Standard high precision path "Wideband" Wideband path with 50 MHz lowpass filter "Narrowband" Narrowband path with 10.7 MHz bandpass filter Can only be selected if Direct IF access is not used as Receiver...
  • Page 487 ® GUI reference R&S Pwr Bw Avg softtool The average factor is also valid for calibration sweeps. The calculation of system cor- rection data is based on the averaged trace. Factor / On / Reset "Factor" defines the number of averaged traces, "On" enables or disables the sweep average, "Reset"...

  • Page 488: Sweep Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool 5.10 Sweep Softtool The "Sweep" softtool allows you to define the scope of the measurement in the active channel. The available settings comprise the sweep type (with related parameters), the trigger conditions, and the periodicity of the measurement. Access: Channel –...
  • Page 489 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool Number of Points Sets the total number of measurement points per sweep. The minimum number of points is 1 (measurement at a single frequency/power/time value). The maximum depends on the analyzer type. Sets the total number of measurement points per sweep. The minimum number of points is 1 (measurement at a single frequency/power/time value), the maximum is 100,001.
  • Page 490 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool Sweep Time / Auto Varies the measurement time for a sweep or delays the start of each sweep. ● "Sweep Time" is the total measurement time for the sweep. The minimum possible sweep time is equal to the estimated value in "Auto" mode. Setting a larger sweep time is equivalent to defining a Meas Delay before each partial measurement.

  • Page 491: Sweep Type Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool "Auto" Lets the firmware determine the adequate wait time between consec- utive measurement points. The firmware chooses the maximum required switch + settling time of all measurement points as the con- stant wait time. "User Def"...
  • Page 492 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool 5.10.2.1 Controls on the Sweep Type tab Lin Freq In a linear frequency sweep, the stimulus frequency is swept in equidistant steps over the continuous frequency range. The frequency range (sweep range) and the internal generator power can be specified in the "Stimulus"...
  • Page 493 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE LINear Log Freq In a "Log Freq" sweep, the stimulus frequency is swept on a logarithmic scale over the continuous frequency range. The frequency range (sweep range) and the internal gen- erator power can be specified in the "Stimulus"...
  • Page 494 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool Segmented In a "Segmented" (linear) frequency sweep, the sweep range can be composed of sev- eral continuous frequency sub-ranges or single frequency points. The sub-ranges are termed sweep segments and are defined in the Define Segments dialog.
  • Page 495 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool Any generator power calibration or attenuation of the active source step attenuators is included. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE POWer CW Mode "CW Mode" sweeps, like Time sweeps, are performed at constant frequency and stim- ulus power, which can be specified in the "Stimulus" settings (see Chapter 5.8.1, "Stim- ulus tab",...
  • Page 496 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool The time interval between two consecutive trigger pulses must not be smaller than the minimum measurement time per measurement point. See "Sweep Time / Auto" on page 490. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE POINt Time "Time" sweeps, like CW Mode sweeps, are performed at constant frequency and stim- ulus power, which can be specified in the "Stimulus"...
  • Page 497 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool Pulse Profile This sweep type is only available, if the R&S ZNA is equipped with software option R&S ZNA-K7 Pulsed measurements. Activates the pulse profile sweep defined in the Pulse Modulation dialog. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE PULSe Phase Imbalance/ Amplitude Imbalance These sweep types are only available, if the R&S ZNA is equipped with software option...
  • Page 498 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool Tip: Overlapping limit line and ripple limit line segments are not displayed when a point-based x-axis is active; see Chapter 4.4.1.1, "Rules for limit line definition", on page 141. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:SEGMent:AXIS Reverse Reverses the direction of the sweep. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:REVerse Fast Power Sweep...
  • Page 499 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool "On" In this mode, the power level is swept continuously and linearly from "Start Power" to "Stop Power" (swept mode, faster). For each sweep point, measurement takes place over a range of power levels. Assuming the phase drifts linearly during the sweep time, the phase can be removed from the measurement results.
  • Page 500 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool Table Columns The table in the upper part of the "Define Segments" dialog contains an automatically assigned current number for each segment plus the following editable or non-editable columns: ● "On" provides check boxes to activate or deactivate each individual segment. Sweep points in inactive segments are not measured and not listed in the "Point List".
  • Page 501 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool ● "Delete All" clears the entire segment list so it is possible to define or load a new segmented sweep range. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:ADD [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:INSert [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:DELete[:DUMMy] [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:DELete:ALL Show Point List... Opens a list of all active sweep points and their channel settings. All columns except "Point", "Segment"...
  • Page 502 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool Example: The segmented sweep range is described by the following sweep segment file: Note: The *.SegList file actually contains more columns listing all channel settings of the individual sweep segments. The headings of the additional columns are IF Band- width [Hz], en:IF Selectivity, en:IF Sideband, Meas Delay [µs], bo:Sweep Time Auto,en:Frq Sweep Mode.
  • Page 503 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool Optional Columns Each selected (checked) option adds a column to the segment list and the point list. ● "Name" allows you to assign a name to each segment. A segment name is a string that is allowed to contain letters, numbers and special characters.

  • Page 504: Trigger Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool When "Time" is checked, two new columns appear in the table. The first column is titled "Segment Time" or "Meas Delay", depending on the selected radio button below the "Time" checkbox. The second column is titled "Auto" and is used to acti- vate automatic sweep time setting.
  • Page 505 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool Any trigger event can start an entire sweep or a part of it. Moreover, it is possible to switch off the RF source between consecutive triggered measurement sequences, and to define a delay between trigger events and the measurement sequences. Background information Refer to Chapter 4.1.4.1, "Partial measurements and driving...
  • Page 506 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool FreeRun / External / Manual / Multiple Triggers These four buttons select the trigger source: ● In "FreeRun" mode, a new measurement is started immediately without waiting for a trigger event and without fixed time reference. The remaining trigger settings are not valid.
  • Page 507 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool ● "Partial Measurement" means that each trigger event starts the next partial mea- surement at the current or at the next sweep point. If every sweep point only requires a single partial measurement, this option is equivalent to "Point". See also Chapter 4.1.4.1, "Partial measurements and driving mode",...
  • Page 508 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool Signal Type Specifies the "External" trigger mode in detail. ● "Rising Edge"/"Falling Edge" means that the rising/falling slope of every external trigger pulse can trigger a single measurement sequence. ● "Active High"/"Active Low" means that the analyzer measures in "FreeRun" mode as long as the external trigger signal is high/low.
  • Page 509 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool ... /Logic/ ... The table defines all settings related to "Multiple Triggers". For all measurement sequences it is possible to select (and configure) the related trigger logic: ● no trigger required ("Free Run") ● a single trigger source with configurable Signal Type ●...

  • Page 510: Sweep Control Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool ● sending the high voltage level in active state and the low level otherwise ("Active High"), or vice versa ("Active Low"). Note that pulse generator pulses cannot be indicated using high and low voltage lev- els.
  • Page 511 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool 5.10.4.1 Controls on the Sweep Control tab Continuous / Single Activate either continuous (default) or single sweep mode. ● In "Continuous" sweep mode, the analyzer measures the related channel (or chan- nels) continuously, repeating the current sweep over and over. ●...
  • Page 512 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool Sweeps/Memory Size "Sweeps" defines the number of sweeps to be performed (and buffered) in "Single" sweep mode (see "Continuous / Single" on page 511). In "Continuous" sweep mode, and if Controlled Timing is inactive, it is not available (grayed out). In "Continuous"...
  • Page 513 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool ● "All Channels on Hold": all channels are set to "Single" sweep mode. Restart Sweep initiates a new measurement cycle. These actions are only available for the DEFAULT Remote Language). For other remote languages, the Continuous / Single setting applies to all channels and the "All Channels Continuous"/"All Channels on Hold"...
  • Page 514 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool Related information Refer to Chapter 4.1.4, "Sweep control", on page 87. Sweep All Channels/Sweeps If you select "Sweep All Channels", Restart Sweep restarts the sweep in all channels of the active recall set. For the DEFAULT Remote Language, the number of sweeps in single sweep mode is channel-specific and can be defined in the table below the separator line.

  • Page 515: Cal Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool 5.11 Cal softtool The "Cal" softtool provides all functions related to system error calibration, scalar power calibration, and "SMARTerCal". Access: Channel – [Cal] 5.11.1 Start Cal tab The "Start Cal" tab provides access to all functions for automatic or manual calibration. Calibration of the R&S ZNA is a fully guided process.
  • Page 516 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Figure 5-20: Select Calibration Properties dialog: scalar mixer measurements For the standard mode a calibration unit is used, if connected. Measurement Traces Power meter Calibration setup mode Standard only one-port – POSM ✓ at least one two- –...
  • Page 517 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Figure 5-21: Select Calibration Properties dialog: vector mixer measurements 5.11.1.2 Controls on the Start Cal tab All controls on the "Start Cal" are buttons and each of them opens a dialog or dock widget wizard. The buttons are grouped in three sections. ●...
  • Page 518 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool calibration. You can also switch to another channel and configure/start this channel's calibration (see Chapter 4.2.2.3, "Multi-channel setup dialog", on page 112). ● "Calibrate All" section The main purpose of the buttons in this section is to perform complex multi-channel calibrations in an efficient way.
  • Page 519 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool For complex calibrations, the wizard proceeds in several steps ("Next"/"Back" buttons at the bottom of the dock widget). On "Apply", the R&S ZNA calculates the system error corrections and/or power corrections from the acquired data and applies the result to the related channels.
  • Page 520 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Background and related information ● Refer to Chapter 4.5, "Calibration", on page 158 for background information ● For the description of the source flatness and source power cal steps, see the des- ription of the Power Cal wizard.
  • Page 521 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Start Cal Sweep The dock widget below the diagrams shows the calibrated ports and standards and vis- ualizes the measurement progress. Use the buttons representing the calibration standards to start the corresponding cali- bration sweeps. If "Show Cal Kit Label"...
  • Page 522 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool "Don't Show this Dialog Again" has the same effect as disabling "Show Cal Kit Label". A green checkmark indicates that the calibration data of a standard has been acquired successfully. A green checkmark after the port symbol indicates that the minimum number of calibration measurements for the port has been performed.
  • Page 523 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Incompatibilities between the selected calibration type, the standards and the channel settings can cause the calibration to be inaccurate. The analyzer auto-detects potential sources of errors and displays appropriate, self-explanatory notice boxes. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE:SELected[:DUMMy] [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE:SELected:DEFault [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:DELete...
  • Page 524 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool 2. If a SMARterCal is performed: a) Replace the calibration unit by the power meter. b) Start the power calibration sweep. The upper part of the screen displays power trace diagrams and the lower part dis- plays the power meter connection.
  • Page 525 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Calibration Sweep Diagrams During the calibration sweep, each diagram contains a single S-parameter trace and a typical result trace for the measured calibration standard. The purpose of the typical result traces "Trc1"" and "Trc2" is to avoid connection errors: If the correct standard type is measured, and everything is properly connected, then the measured trace is expected to be similar to the typical trace.
  • Page 526 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:ASSignment<Asg>:ACQuire [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:POWer Detect Ports & Start Cal Performs the "Detect Port Assignment" and "Start Cal Sweep" functions, one after the other. Detect Port Assignment Starts a procedure by which the R&S ZNA (with a little help from the attached calibra- tion unit) auto-detects the connected ports.
  • Page 527 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:SAVE [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:POWer 5.11.1.4 Calibration setup dialog Allows you to configure the calibration setup of the available channels. Access: ● Channel – [Cal] > "Start Cal" > "Cal Active Channel" – "Configure/Start Calibration" ● Calibrate All dialog >...
  • Page 528 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Messages in the dialog An information message (or error message) is displayed if one of the following hap- pens: ● One of the selected calibration kits is described by ideal kit parameters or typical values.
  • Page 529 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:CONNection<PhyPt> [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SCONnection<PhyPt> [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection:CATalog? [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection:DELete Use "Add" to add a calibration definition to the selected channel. The default calibration type depends on the channel's measurement mode. Delete Select a row in the Cal.
  • Page 530 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Common Port ← Cal. Settings This column is only available if "Use Reduced Number of Through" on page 789 is activated in the "Calibration" tab of the "System Config" dialog. For full n-port automatic calibrations, it defines the port that must appear in each port assignment, and that are as the "center"...
  • Page 531 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Figure 5-25: Define Calibration dialog: automatic calibration The green arrow symbols give a preview of the type and the number of calibration sweeps involved: ● Curved arrows (example: "Refl Norm Open") denote one or more reflection mea- surements at each port.
  • Page 532 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Cal Kit Port <i> ← Cal. Settings For each physical port covered by the selected calibration definition, you can select a cal kit,cal unit, or inline calibration system. The drop-down list contains the kits for the selected connector type and the connected calibration units.
  • Page 533 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool CalUnit Con ← Cal. Settings Opens the "Calibration Unit" dialog that allows you to define the port assignments for an automatic calibration. The R&S ZNA always proposes an optimum solution (minimum number of assign- ments) that also minimizes the physical port reconnections required between calibra- tion stages.
  • Page 534 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool "Detect Port Assignment" [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:PORTs:CONNection? "Default Port Assignment" [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:ASSignment:DEFine:DEFault [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:ASSignment:DEFine:TPORt: DEFault Temperature Compensation ← Cal. Settings Available for inline calibration systems (ICS) only. Applies to all inline calibration units (ICUs) that are connected to the ICS and that are used with factory characterization data.
  • Page 535 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:FRANge? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:PORTs? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:WARMup[:STATe]? Autoset Calibration Resets the calibration to its default for the current channel mode. Remote command: n.a. Repeat Cal If checked, measurement data of the active calibration are reused (if available), which allows the calibration to be repeated without repeating all measurements.
  • Page 536 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Harmonic Orders to Calibrate If a harmonics measurement is active in the current channel, this section allows you to specify the harmonic orders to be calibrated in the current channel. By default, the firmware selects all harmonic orders that are relevant for an existing harmonics trace in this channel.
  • Page 537 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:HARMonic[:ACQuire] [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:POWer<PhyPt>:HARMonic:ACQuire IMD Cal Method>Fast Cal Interp. Meas This checkbox is enabled, if the channel is configured for an intermodulation (IMD) measurement. To avoid interpolation of calibration data, which causes problems during the measure- ment, it is preferable to increase the number of sweep points during the calibration.
  • Page 538 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Cal. Power Settings tab The "Cal Power Setting" tab collects all calibration-related power settlings that were previously distributed across several softtool tabs and dialogs. Source Power "Power" on page 477. Source Step Att Source step attenuator setting used during calibration, if activated. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:ADVanced:SOURce<PhyPt>:ATTenuator on page 1242...
  • Page 539 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Example: Use of an amplifier in the signal path Assume that a DUT requires a constant input power of +25 dBm, and that the mea- surement path contains an amplifier with a 30 dB gain. After a reset of the analyzer, the channel power P is -10 dBm.
  • Page 540 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Noise Figure tab In this tab, you can adjust noise figure calibration settings such as power levels and detector times. Quickset functionality in the Noise figure setup dialog automatically chooses suita- ble calibration settings. Manual configuration requires carefully chosen power levels, depending on the active receiver step attenuator internal preamplifier...
  • Page 541 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Choose a source power between -10 dBm and 0 dBm for reference receiver calibra- tion, to ensure a high-quality calibration. Values entered for "Calibration Power Settings" and "Ref Receiver Cal Power" are mir- rored to the "Cal Power Settings" and vice versa. The detector times determine the trace noise during measurement of the calibration standards and the receiver noise measurement.
  • Page 542 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Screen elements From top to bottom, the screen consists of the following elements. Calibration Sweep Diagram The calibration sweep diagram in the upper part of the screen shows the progress of the calibration and the accuracy of a completed calibration ("Verification"). The diagram is scaled in "dB Mag"...
  • Page 543 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool During a measurement receiver calibration ("Meas. Receiver"), the following traces are displayed: ● The trace "a<m>(P<m>)" shows the (previously calibrated) power at the calibrated reference plane (source port P<m>). ● The trace "b<n>(P<m>)" shows the current power reading of the analyzer at the calibrated receive port P<n>...
  • Page 544 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool In the converter configuration above, P1 and P2 drive the RF IN ports of converter 1 and 2, respectively, and the Converter LO port drives the LO IN ports of both con- verters. Since firmware version 2.40, the "Leveling Table" buttons give access to the con- verter leveling functionality that previously required a separate tool.
  • Page 545 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool The power calibration state is indicated in the trace list, see Chapter 4.5.6.3, "Power calibration labels", on page 195. Use the functions in the Chapter 5.11.4, "Use Cal tab", on page 579 to activate, deactivate, or store power calibrations. Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection[:ACQuire] [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:POWer<PhyPt>:ACQuire...
  • Page 546 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Start Cal Sweep Starts the calibration sweeps for the selected port and power calibration settings and closes the dialog. The calibration is performed as described in "Calibration procedure" on page 193. Open the Pwr Cal Settings tab if you wish to modify the calibration procedure.
  • Page 547 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool left: = source and meas. port identical right = source and meas. port different Port Overview The dialog shows all receiver ports of the network analyzer. The selected port is dis- played with the current cal power settings (see Chapter 5.11.3.2, "Cal Power Config dialog", on page 574);...
  • Page 548 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Start Cal Sweep Start the calibration sweep for the selected port and power calibration settings and close the dialog. The calibration is performed as described in "Calibration procedure" on page 194. No additional calibration settings are needed. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:POWer<PhyPt>:ACQuire [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:POWer:DATA...
  • Page 549 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Start Frequency/Stop Frequeny Defines the start and stop frequency of the leveling grid. By default the vector network analyzer uses the standard frequency range of the selected "Meas Port". Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:SLEVeling:FREQuency:STARt SOURce:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:SLEVeling:FREQuency:STOP Number of Points Defines the number of frequency sweep points of the leveling grid.
  • Page 550 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool The value can be decreased down to 0.1 dB, but is only recommended for converters with extremely steep power transfer characteristics. If ALC Step Size is checked, the value is set to 1 dB and disabled. Remote command: SOURce:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:SLEVeling:POWer:STEP ALC Step Size...
  • Page 551 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool left = "Ref. Receiver" Pwr Cal Method right = "Power Meter" Pwr Cal Method Start Cal Sweep Start the calibration sweeps for the selected port and power calibration settings and close the dialog. The calibration is performed as described in "Calibration procedure"...
  • Page 552 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Calibration definition table The upper half of the "Calibrate All" dialog shows the calibration definitions of all chan- nels. Each row contains a single calibration definition for one channel. Tap the Add + Modify button to open the Calibration setup dialog, which allows you to...
  • Page 553 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool ● For an automatic calibration (left), it displays the port assignment. ● For a manual calibration (right), it displays the ports with their connector, gender and cal kit. For a given port, these values are shared among the related manual channel cali- bration definitions.
  • Page 554 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Step 3: ports and calibration types In step 3 the "Guided Calibration" wizards repeatedly calls the Chapter 5.11.1.3, "Cali- bration wizard", on page 518. During the calibration phase, a progress bar below the active calibration wizard's dock widget indicates the overall progress of the guided calibration.
  • Page 555 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Data of completed calibrations are saved, data of incomplete calibrations are discar- ded. 5.11.1.8 Channel Selection for Calibration dialog If you initiate a guided calibration and there is more than one channel in the current recall set, you are prompted to select the channels to be calibrated: ●...
  • Page 556 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Basic mode In basic mode, the validation runs automatically, with autodetected ports and the set- tings specified in Advanced mode (default settings after a system [Preset]). Use "Detect Port Assignment" to detect the current port assignment (after reconnecting the calibration unit).
  • Page 557 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Use "Detect Port Assignment" to detect the current port assignment (after reconnecting the calibration unit). Measurement Selects the measurement to be performed in advanced mode and runs it Characterization Selects the calibration unit characterization to be used for the validation. By default the factory characterization is used.

  • Page 558: Cal Devices Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Preferences Allows you to configure the behavior of the validation diagrams and traces. Unchecking "Auto Scale" prevents the traces from scaling as the measurement and/or standard changes. Unchecking "Average On" turns off averaging. Basic Mode Switches to Basic mode 5.11.2 Cal Devices tab...
  • Page 559 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool The list shows the available connector types with their name ("Conn. Type") and polar- ity ("Sexless"). The remaining columns in the list are described below. Storing connector type settings Calibration kits and connector types are global resources; the parameters are stored independently and available for all recall sets.
  • Page 560 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection Line Type / Rel. Permittivity εr / Cutoff Freq. fc "Line Type" describes the wave propagation mode (offset model) in the transmission lines of the standards associated with the connector type. ●...
  • Page 561 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection:CATalog? [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection:DELete 5.11.2.2 Calibration Kits dialog The "Calibration Kits" dialog shows the available calibration kits for the different con- nector types. It is also used for cal kit and cal kit file management. Access: Channel –...
  • Page 562 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Controls in the Calibration Kits dialog Connector Type The "Connector Type" table displays the available cal kit connector types. Select a row in this table to get the list of Available Cal Kits. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection:CATalog? Available Cal Kits Displays the cal kits for the selected...
  • Page 563 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool If option K50 "Measurement Uncertainty Analysis" is installed, the "KitModified" column is replaced by an "Uncertainty" column, indicating whether the kits contains uncertainty information for all its calibration standards. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:CKIT:CATalog? Add / Copy / Delete / Standards... The buttons in the right part of the dialog are used to manage calibration kits: ●...
  • Page 564 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool One port and two port standards are listed in two separate tables. Most of the buttons on the right side are available only if the "Kit Standards" dialog was opened for a user- defined calibration kit. One Port Standards / Two Port Standards The standard tables contain the following information: ●...
  • Page 565 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool ibration kit file, instead of the gender. During the calibration, the analyzer checks whether the cal kit contains the necessary standard types for the required ports. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:CKIT:<StandardType> [SENSe:]CORRection:CKIT:<ConnType>:SELect Add / Copy... / Delete / View / Modify... The buttons in the right part of the dialog are used to manage standards: ●...
  • Page 566 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool The diagram in the "View / Modify Cal Kit Standards" dialog depends on the standard type for which the dialog was opened. Moreover, it is possible to modify the circuit model using the buttons in the upper right of the dialog. Offset Parameters The entries in the upper part of the "View / Modify Cal Kit Standards"...
  • Page 567 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Load Parameters The entries in the lower part of the "View / Modify Cal Kit Standards" dialog specify the load parameters for a particular calibration standard describing its terminal impedance. The circuit model for the load consists of capacitance C which is connected in parallel to an inductance L and a resistance R, both connected in series.
  • Page 568 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Controls in the Characterize Cal Unit dialog Calibration Unit Displays the connected calibration units. The R&S ZNA auto-detects all calibration units which are connected to one of its USB ports. If several cal units are connected, one of them must be selected for characterization (active cal unit).
  • Page 569 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool The properties of the selected characterization are shown below the list. "Delete" dele- tes the selected characterization file; "Start Characterization..." opens the Characteri- zation wizard to create a characterization. Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:CKIT:CATalog? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:CKIT:STANdard:CATalog? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:SDATa? Characterization wizard The "Characterization"...
  • Page 570 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Test Port Assignment Defines the assignment between test ports and cal unit ports. In the default "Manual" assignment, VNA ports and cal unit port numbers match. If you decide to use a differ- ent assignment, you can auto-detect the actual assignment ("Automatic") or select the analyzer port numbers manually.
  • Page 571 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Next Proceeds to Step 2: Save Characterization Data . Next is available when the R&S ZNA has acquired characterization data for a single port. Step 2: Save Characterization Data Saves the characterization data to the calibration unit. Figure 5-26: Save Characterization Data Save File to SD Card For all calibration units, characterization data can be saved to the calibration unit's...

  • Page 572: Pwr Cal Settings Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool 5.11.3 Pwr Cal Settings tab Gives access to all functions for power meter and power calibration data handling (transmission coefficients). Power calibration of the R&S ZNA is a fully menu-guided process. Efficient power calibration procedure ●...
  • Page 573 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Some buttons serve as openers for additional dialogs: ● "Cal Power...": see Chapter 5.11.3.2, "Cal Power Config dialog", on page 574 ● "Transm. Coefficients...": see Chapter 5.11.3.3, "Power Meter Transmission Coeffi- cients dialog", on page 577 ●...
  • Page 574 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool "Power Meter Use a power meter for the calibration of the reference receiver and only" the flatness calibration. Perform a flatness calibration using the reference receiver. Do not "Ref. Receiver only" recalibrate the reference receiver; use the best available reference receiver calibration instead.
  • Page 575 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool The diagram in the center of the dialog visualizes the settings and results below. Port Cal Power Allows you to define (port-specific) power levels for source power calibrations. Port Overview ← Port Cal Power The dialog shows all source ports of the network analyzer.
  • Page 576 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet SOURce<Ch>:RLO:PABSolut Source Attenuation ← Port Cal Power "Source Step Att." on page 477- Port Power Offset ← Port Cal Power Defines a port-specific offset to the Channel Base Power The actual output power at the port is equal to the "Channel Base Power"...
  • Page 577 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool By default, the "Reference Receiver Cal Power" is set to the resulting Port Cal Power. However, the accuracy of the source power calibration depends on the power meter's measurement accuracy. Therefore it is advantageous to select a "Reference Receiver Cal Power"...
  • Page 578 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Test Setup The button group on the right of the dialog allows you to select a test setup with an additional two-port device. This device can be located in front of the DUT (during the measurement) or in front of the power meter (during power calibration).

  • Page 579: Use Cal Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:TCOefficient:INSert<ListNo> SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:TCOefficient:DEFine<ListNo> SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:TCOefficient:COUNt? SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:TCOefficient:DELete<ListNo>[: DUMMy] SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:TCOefficient:DELete<ListNo>: Get Trace... Opens a selection box containing all traces in the active recall set. The "dB Mag" val- ues of the selected trace are used to define the transmission coefficients. Notice that if you combine different channels with different sweep points, the analyzer possibly has to interpolate or extrapolate the transmission coefficients.
  • Page 580 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool 5.11.4.1 Controls on the Use Cal tab User Cal Active Activates or deactivates the system error correction in the active channel. "User Cal Active" is available only if a valid system error correction is available for the active channel;...
  • Page 581 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Load match correction can provide a significant improvement of the transmission S- parameter measurements if the load ports are poorly matched. With sufficiently matched load ports, you can disable the correction to gain speed. Note: Disable the load match correction if your test setup or DUT is not suited for reverse sweeps or if you want to gain speed.
  • Page 582 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Manage Cals – Join Calibration... Opens the JoinCal dialog 5.11.4.2 Active Power Cals dialog The "Active Power Cals" dialog shows the power calibrations that are compatible with the active channel configuration. It allows you to enable or disable the available power calibrations.
  • Page 583 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool In the converter configuration above, P1 and P2 drive the RF IN ports of converter 1 and 2, respectively, and the Converter LO port drives the LO IN ports of both convert- ers. If the source flatness calibration at the converter port is enabled, then the flatness cal at the RF IN port is disabled (and grayed out).
  • Page 584 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Channel State The "Channel State" table shows all channels in the active recall set together with their current calibration. Channels can use either the active channel calibration (if available), a previously stored user correction data or the factory system error correction (indica- ted as '--').
  • Page 585 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool For channels that are linked to a "Cal Group" (using "Apply" or "Apply to All"), a new calibration overwrites the cal group data and hence affects all channels that are also linked to this cal group. An "Overwrite Warning" is displayed in this case. To continue with the calibration, confirm by using button "Overwrite Current File?"...
  • Page 586 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool "Ch<n> Calibration Properties" also indicates settings mismatches (between the selected channel and the channel setup that was used during calibration) that lead to a "Cal Off". Currently this indication is limited to settings related to Parallel Measure- ments with Frequency Offset.

  • Page 587: Metas Cal Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool 5.11.5 METAS Cal tab The controls on the "METAS Cal" tab allow you to set up the instrument for real-time measurement uncertainty analysis. It is only visible if option R&S ZNA-K50 and METAS VNA Tools (version 2.2.3 or higher) are installed on the instrument. ●...
  • Page 588 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Save Measurement Allows you to save the current measurement results to the temporary METAS VNA Tools project that is created under the hood during the METAS calibration. This project can be saved using the Export Data to METAS VNA Tools function.
  • Page 589 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Note: The exported file can be directly unzipped to the METAS VNA Tools user data folder (default: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Metas.Vna.Tools). After (re-)opening the METAS VNA Tools, the exported project and its associated static data are available for offline analysis. METAS Reconnection Opens the METAS Reconnection...
  • Page 590 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool The analyzer fimware automatically activates/deactivates ports during/after a (success- ful) calibration: ● Calibrated ports that were previously disabled, are automatically enabled as single- ended logical ports. ● An uncalibrated port that is not used by a measurement (i.e. the port is not required by any trace of the related channel) is disabled.
  • Page 591 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Step 2: Connectors and Cal Kits Connector/Gender Specifies the connector and gender of the ports selected in Step 1: Ports and Type. Note that METAS compatible file formats do not contain information about the related connector type, so you have to make sure to choose a suitable Kit.
  • Page 592 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool The "Uncertainty" checkbox indicates whether the selected characterization actually comprises uncertainties. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:CKIT:SELect Same Connector All Ports / Same Gender All Ports Assigns the same connector type or gender to all selected physical ports. For some multi-port calibration types, the port connector types must be equal, e.g.
  • Page 593 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Step 3: Calibration In step 3, the calibration is performed. The procedure is the same as for regular cali- brations of the selected type (see Chapter 5.11.1.3, "Calibration wizard", on page 518). On "Apply", the raw calibration data are transferred to METAS VNA Tools, which take over the calculation of measurement results and uncertainties: METAS Cal Active enabled automatically.
  • Page 594 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Verification Kit Allows you to specify the verification kits to be used for the related ports. Verification standards are characterized individually, including uncertainties. So initially no verification kits are defined. Use Import Verification Kit... to import your verification kit.
  • Page 595 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool The imported verification kit is assigned to the selected Connector type; the name of the ZIP file is used as the verification kit name. The name of a characterization file inside the zip container must indicate ●...
  • Page 596 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Save Verification Data Same as Export Data to METAS VNA Tools. The exported ZIP file now also contains the METAS verification configuration, and the verification measurement data obtained so far. 5.11.5.4 METAS Reconnection dialog While a METAS calibration is active, you can notify the METAS VNA Tools about addi- tional reconnections and/or cable movements.

  • Page 597: Channel Config Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool The effect of a reconnection depends on the selected connector, the effect of a cable movement depends on the selected cable (on their respective models, to be precise). For the METAS calibration, the VNA firmware reports the minimum possible number of reconnections (depending on the selected calibration type) and no cable movements.
  • Page 598 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool 5.12.1.1 Controls on the Channels tab The buttons in the "Channels" tab open the following dialogs: ● "Channel Manager...": see Chapter 5.12.1.2, "Channel Manager dialog", on page 600 ● "RFFE...": see Chapter 5.12.1.3, "RFFE Config dialog for R&S ZN-B15/-Z15 Var. 03", on page 601 Active Channel...
  • Page 599 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool The new channel is named Ch<n>, where <n> is the largest of all existing channel numbers plus one. The name can be changed in the "Channel Manager" dialog. Tips: ● To create a channel and a trace with default settings and to display the trace in a new diagram area, use New Channel + Diagram.
  • Page 600 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool Tips: Use the "Undo" function to restore a channel that was unintentionally deleted. Remote command: CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>[:STATe] Channel On Toggles the measurement state of the Active Channel. Remote command: CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:MEASure[:STATe] Fixture Simulator The "Fixture Simulator" switch deactivates or activates the configured deembedding, embedding, balanced ports, and port impedance settings for the selected channel.
  • Page 601 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool Channel table The rows and columns of the channel table represent the existing channels (rows) together with certain editable (white) or non-editable (gray) properties (columns). ● "Name" indicates the name of the related channel. ●...
  • Page 602 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool Background information Refer to Chapter 4.7.25, "RFFE GPIO interface", on page 276. For more details about the voltage range, clock frequency ranges and their steps sizes, refer to Chapter 12.3.4, "RFFE - GPIO interface", on page 1650.
  • Page 603 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool Sweep Sequencer tab Gives access to the "Sweep Sequencer" functionality, see Chapter 5.12.1.6, "Sweep Sequencer", on page 610. GPIOs tab The "GPIOs" tab is split into two parts: ● The left part of the table area (up to column "Output Voltage") allows you to define and apply the GPIO pin voltages (see "Basic GPIO configuration"...
  • Page 604 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool 5.12.1.4 RFFE interface configuration Access: RFFE tab of the "RFFE Config" dialog Basic RFFE interface settings and command execution The RFFE config table gives access to the channel-specific setup of the two RFFE bus interfaces RFFE1 and RFFE2.
  • Page 605 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool CLK, VIO, VLow, VHigh These columns give access to the physical properties of the RFFE interfaces: clock rate ("CLK"), supply voltage ("VIO") and the voltage levels of the data signal SDATA ("VLow") and clock signal SCLK ("VHigh"). Remote command: CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:SETTings:FREQuency CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:SETTings:VOLTage:IO...
  • Page 606 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool SEND Use the "SEND" button to send the previously defined command, e.g. before starting the sweep for the related channel. On a R&S ZN-B15/Z15 var. 03, before the command is executed the related shunt resistance is set to its minimum possible value.
  • Page 607 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool Remote command: CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:DATA:RANGe CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:DATA:SHUNt? CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:VIO:RANGe CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:CLOCk:SHUNt? CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:VIO:RANGe CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:VIO:SHUNt? Use the "Set" button to apply all RFFE configuration changes and to activate the con- figured voltage and Range / Shunt settings on the RFFE pins. Remote command: CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE:TEST:OUTPut Start Meas...
  • Page 608 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool Figure 5-27: Basic GPIO Configuration for HW Var. 03 Seq. Enables/disables the corresponding GPIO pin in the Sweep Sequencer (see Chap- ter 5.12.1.6, "Sweep Sequencer", on page 610). Remote command: CONTrol<Ch>:GPIO<Port>[:STATe] Voltage / Output Voltage Sets the (default) voltage of the respective GPIO pin for R&S ZN-B15/-Z15 Var.
  • Page 609 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool ● The measurement parameters are channel-specific. However only one configura- tion can be measured at a time. ● Voltage and current measurements on the RFFE and GPIO pins are only possible with Var. 03 of the extension board R&S ZN-B15/-Z15 (part number 1323.9355.03 or 1325.5905.03).
  • Page 610 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool The measurement (=sampling) time can only be set via remote command. It is not channel-specific and applies to RFFE and GPIO measurements. Remote command: CONTrol<Ch>:GPIO:SENSe:TRIGger CONTrol<Ch>:GPIO:TIME Voltage, Current Results of the voltage/current measurements on the related GPIO pins. Remote command: CONTrol:GPIO<Port>:SENSe:VOLTage? CONTrol:GPIO<Port>:SENSe:CURRent?
  • Page 611 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool 2. Use the "Add" or "Insert" button to add a new step to the command/switch sequence - either at the end of the existing sequence or above the selected step, respectively. 3. Make the appropriate settings in the sweep sequencer table: a) Define the RFFE commands ("RFFE"...

  • Page 612: Port Config Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool Wait (Sweep Sequencer Table) The cells in the "Wait" column define the delay times between subsequent sequence steps and between the final sequence step and the sweep (segment) start. Remote command: Unsegmented sweeps CONTrol<Ch>:SEQuence<Nr>:DELay Segmented sweeps: CONTrol<Ch>:SEGMent<Nr>:DELay...
  • Page 613 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool Combiner Tells the analyzer if and how signals from two ports are combined. For descriptions and visualizations of the supported combiner configurations, see "Combiner Configuration" on page 338. Balanced Ports... Opens a dialog that allows you to enable/disable physical ports and to define logical ports (balanced or unbalanced) in the active channel.
  • Page 614 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool Related information Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 4.7.3, "Frequency conversion measurements", on page 234 ● Chapter 5.19.4.2, "External Power Meters dialog", on page 817 ● Chapter 5.19.5.2, "External Generators dialog", on page 823 ●...
  • Page 615 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool Non-editable table cells In addition to the test ports ("Port" or "Conv"), the source ports include all configured External generators ("Source Gen"), and the LO Out port ("Conv. LO"), if not assigned to a converter. In addition to the test ports ("Port"), the source ports include all configured external generators ("Source Gen").
  • Page 616 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool available as a signal source in the test setup. The analyzer provides two alternative, independent ways of selecting a generator as a signal source: ● Check "Source Gen" in the "Port Settings" dialog, especially if the generator is not assigned to a particular measurement result or drive port.
  • Page 617 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool This cell is only enabled, if the analyzer is equipped with option R&S ZNA-K4. The result is displayed in the "Frequency Result" column. A red "Freq. Conversion" field indicates that certain hardware limits are exceeded. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency<Pt>:CONVersion:ARBitrary Receiver Freq a, b Rslt...
  • Page 618 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool Current Formula Apart from the current Frequency Conversion Formula, the analyzer firmware main- tains a list of named, user-defined formulas. ● "Add Formula to List..." adds the current frequency conversion formula to this list. ●...
  • Page 619 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool Arbitrary Power tab Configures the source ports of the R&S ZNA for port-specific powers. Channel base power After a Reset, all source port powers are set to the channel base power P . For power sweeps, P corresponds to the unmodified sweep range.
  • Page 620 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet SOURce<Ch>:RLO:PABSolut Port Power Offset Defines a port-specific offset to the Channel Base Power The actual output power at the port is equal to the "Channel Base Power" plus the "Port Power Offset". If P is selected as "Channel Base Power", then for a power sweep the actual port power varies across the sweep.
  • Page 621 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool Receiver Level tab Provides access to the receiver step attenuator settings. Receiver step attenuators are optional hardware (see Chapter 4.7.30, "Receiver step attenuators", on page 279). Attenuation Sets the attenuation at the respective measurement receiver (b-wave). See "Receiver Step Att."...
  • Page 622 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool Background information Refer to Chapter 4.7.26, "Direct generator/receiver access", on page 277 and Chap- ter 4.7.29, "Direct IF access", on page 278. Receiver Input Determines how the MEAS and REF signals are routed to the respective receivers. Depending on the selected path, the hardware and factory correction values are set.
  • Page 623 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool If unchecked (default), you can define the Rear IF Frequency manually. However, this frequency is also used internally and is possibly not optimal for the Direct IF Access Input / Output ports. If you activate "Auto Determine IF Out", the analyzer firmware selects suitable rear IF frequencies.
  • Page 624 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool Displayed Columns Opens the Displayed Columns dialog that allows you to configure the columns to be displayed in the current tab. Reset Resets the "Freq. Conversion" and "Power Conversion" settings of all ports. After "Reset", an "Apply"...
  • Page 625 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool Figure 5-29: Displayed Columns dialog (custom tab) For the predefined tabs, only the "General" and the tab's related parameter group ("Arbitrary Frequency", "Arbitrary Power", "Receiver Level", or "Input / Output") are available for selection. Stimulus dialog The "Stimulus"...
  • Page 626 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool Figure 5-31: Stimulus Dialog: Power Sweep Except for the "Enter & Display" properties, all these parameters can also be set in the Sweep Softtool. Depending on the channel's Sweep Type, a different set of parameters can be modified.
  • Page 627 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool Note that setting "Enter & Display" to a particular port, source, or receiver is only possi- ble if option R&S ZNA-K4 is available. Furthermore, a particular port, source, or receiver can only be selected, if the user-defined linear function for calculating the respective frequency/power is not constant.
  • Page 628 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool Figure 5-32: Define Parallel Measurement ● Modified settings are not applied unless the "Define Parallel Measurement" dialog is closed with the "OK" button. ● On "OK", any pre-existing logical port configuration is overwritten. ●...
  • Page 629 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:GROup:COUNt? SOURce<Ch>:GROup<Grp>:NAME Balanced Ports tab The "Balanced Ports" tab of the "Define Parallel Measurement" dialog allows you to define the balanced ports of the configured DUTs. In order to modify the balanced port configuration, proceed as follows: 1.
  • Page 630 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool To get access to the "Frequency Offset" configuration, set "Parallel Measurement" to "Enabled") and activate the "Frequency Offset" tab. It is essential to perform the calibration with the same "Frequency Offset" settings as for the actual measurement;...

  • Page 631: Pwr Cal Settings Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Mode softtool In particular, activation is rejected if: ● the start frequency is < 31 MHz ● the measurement bandwidth is > 100 kHz ● the resulting frequency offset (i.e. the minimum frequency offset, rounded to a mul- tiple of the current frequency step size) would be too high ●...
  • Page 632 ® GUI reference R&S Mode softtool 5.13.1.1 Controls on the Mode tab Driving Mode Determines the order of partial measurements and sweeps. ● In "Auto" mode, the analyzer optimizes the display update: Fast sweeps are per- formed in "Alternated" mode, slower sweeps in "Chopped" mode. ●...
  • Page 633 ® GUI reference R&S Mode softtool eliminate known spurious components in the input signal that can distort the measure- ment, especially in the low frequency range. ● In "Auto" mode, the analyzer auto-selects the LO frequency, depending on the receiver (RF) frequency and the test port. This mode systematically avoids known spurious signals if no frequency conversion occurs in the test setup.
  • Page 634 ® GUI reference R&S Mode softtool The spurious signal can be eliminated by dividing the sweep range into two segments with different LO settings: ● In the low-frequency segment ranging up to the center frequency of the bandpass filter, the frequency of the local oscillator is set to LO < RF. This setting ensures that the spurious signal b' is not measured at port 2.
  • Page 635 ® GUI reference R&S Mode softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SLAMode Use Primed Waves If a (two-tone) Embedded LO mixer group delay measurements is active, in addition to a and b the analyzer can provide "primed" wave quantities a', b'. The unprimed wave quantities correspond to the lower tone, the primed wave quantities correspond to the upper tone.

  • Page 636: Pulse Mod Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Mode softtool Range Segmented IF Gain is enabled, each sweep segment can be configured separately. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:POWer:GAINcontrol [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:POWer:GAINcontrol:ALL Drive-port specific settings "Drive Port", "a<i>", "b<j>": Selects the wideband / narrowband IF gain mode for the respective drive port, a and b wave and receivers.
  • Page 637 ® GUI reference R&S Mode softtool 5.13.2.1 Controls on the Pulse Mod tab "Pulse Mod..." opens the Pulse Modulation dialog. Pulse Generator Enables or disables pulse generation. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:GENerator<Id>[:STATe] Set all Traces to Matching Detector Tells the firmware to select a suitable detector for all traces in the current channel. For background information, see Chapter 4.3.5.3, "Detector settings",...
  • Page 638 ® GUI reference R&S Mode softtool "ZNA and Trace data are processed in the R&S ZNA and I/Q data are pushed VSE" to the R&S VSE. Note: In the "ZNA and VSE" mode, the R&S ZNA acquires the mea- surement data for the trace calculation and the I/Q data to be pushed to the R&S VSE in separate, subsequent sweeps.
  • Page 639 ® GUI reference R&S Mode softtool Schematics The "Schematics" button in the "Pulse Modulation" dialog opens a separate window that visualizes the pulse generation and modulation logic. From left to right: ● The master pulse of the internal pulse generators can either be provided internally ("Pulse Period") or externally, via one of the Trigger In connectors.
  • Page 640 ® GUI reference R&S Mode softtool For unsuitable combinations of the pulse and measurement settings, the firmware dis- plays a warning above the diagram, indicating the detection type and a possible desen- sitization loss of sensitivity of the measurement. Master pulse settings Pulse Gen.
  • Page 641 ® GUI reference R&S Mode softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:PERiod Basic pulse generator settings If option R&S ZNA-K7 is not available, the port-related pulse generators can only oper- ate at a fixed duty cycle. Fixed Duty Cycle/Duty Cycle If "Fixed Duty Cycle" is enabled, the analyzer automatically adjusts the pulse width of the the port-related pulse generators to keep the "Duty Cycle"...
  • Page 642 ® GUI reference R&S Mode softtool Coupled Settings Couples the settings of the port pulse generators, i.e. enforces identical settings for all ports. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:COUPled[:STATe] Pulse Delay/Pulse Width Defines the delay and width of the internally generated pulses. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:PORT<Pt>:DELay [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:PORT<Pt>:WIDTh [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:GENerator<Id>:DELay...
  • Page 643 ® GUI reference R&S Mode softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:GENerator<Id>:TRAin:SEGMent<Seg>:COUNt [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:GENerator<Id>:TRAin:SEGMent<Seg>:STATe [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:GENerator<Id>:TRAin:SEGMent<Seg>:STARt [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:GENerator<Id>:TRAin:SEGMent<Seg>:STOP Pulse modulator control Allows you to control the internal pulse modulators (with options R&S ZNAxx-B4y) and external pulse modulators via PuMo In/Out and Trigger Out (with option R&S ZNA- B91).
  • Page 644 ® GUI reference R&S Mode softtool PuMo In If external Pulse Modulator Control is enabled, this setting allows you to select between positive or negative polarity of the "PuMo In" signal. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:PORT<Pt>:EXTernal:INPut:INVerted[:STATe] Trig. Out Allows you to enable/disable pulse modulator control via the respective "Trig. Out". Note that a Trigger Out that has been previously configured to indicate sweeps, seg- ments or measurement points for this channel, cannot be used for pulse generation.
  • Page 645 ® GUI reference R&S Mode softtool Sync Meas to Pulse Gen. Allows you to switch between synchronous and asynchronous measurement. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:SYNCron[:STATe] Autoset Adjusts "Acq. Delay" and "Acq. Time" according to the configured pulses. 5.13.2.3 VSE Connection Configuration dialog The controls on the "VSE Connection Configuration"...

  • Page 646: Source Coherence Rab

    ® GUI reference R&S Mode softtool Remote command: CONTrol:VSE:LOCal Scan LAN Scans the LAN for VISA resources (VISA auto-discovery). VISA address list A list of known VISA adresses. populated using Scan LAN and extended manually. If you don't want to connect to a Local VSE, mark the address of your remote target R&S VSE as "Active"...
  • Page 647 ® GUI reference R&S Mode softtool 5.13.3.1 Controls on the Source Coherence tab Source Coherence... Opens the Source Coherence dialog. source coherence) and an imbalance sweep is acive, this button is disabled. In this case, the relevant settings can be found in the Coherence Quick Set section.
  • Page 648 ® GUI reference R&S Mode softtool 5.13.3.2 Source Coherence dialog The "Source Coherence" dialog allows you to enable and configure Phase coherent source control True differential mode. Access: ● Channel – [Mode] > "Source coherence" tab > "Source Coherence ..." ●...
  • Page 649 ® GUI reference R&S Mode softtool Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:CMODe:PORT<Pt>[:STATe] Phase Start ← Port-specific parameters (table) Phase of the port, or first phase sweep point if Phase Span is not zero. Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:CMODe:PORT<Pt>:PHASe Phase Span ← Port-specific parameters (table) Total phase difference between first and last phase sweep point (with constant phase steps).

  • Page 650: Timer Settings Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Mode softtool ● "Start Phase" and "Stop Phase" define the phase difference at the start/stop of each sweep Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:TDIF:IMBalance:PHASe:LPORt SOURce<Ch>:TDIF:IMBalance:PHASe:STARt SOURce<Ch>:TDIF:IMBalance:PHASe:STOP Amplitude > Port / Start Power / Stop Power ← Imbalance Sweep Settings ← True Differential Mode Configures the amplitude imbalance sweep type in true differential mode: ●...

  • Page 651: Offset Embed Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Timer Settings This button group allows you to define how the firmware calculates the "hardware set- tling wait times" in the current channel. "Auto" (default) Let the firmware choose the suitable algorithm, based on the chan- nel's current measurement task "MonoFre- Manually (and statically) select one of the "hardware settling wait...
  • Page 652 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Figure 5-33: Offset Embed dock widget: Overview (Calculation Flow) Use one of the buttons to configure the corresponding function. A green LED on a but- ton indicates that the corresponding deembedding/embedding function is active. If the "Fixture Simulator"...
  • Page 653 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Loss at DC / Loss at 1st Freq / 1st Freq for Loss / Use 2nd Freq / Loss at 2nd Freq / 2nd Freq for Loss Defines the one-way loss parameters of the transmission line at the selected port. In the limit case, where the length of the transmission line is considered to be "almost zero", the loss is considered constant: Otherwise, if the loss at DC and one additional frequency f...
  • Page 654 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Displayed Columns Opens a dialog that lets you select between different ways to specify the offset, similar Delay / Electrical Length / Mech. Length on the Offset tab. 5.14.1.3 Single Ended panel Allows you to activate or deactivate single ended deembedding/embedding for selected physical ports.
  • Page 655 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool File Name 1 / Swap Gates The ellipsis button in the "File Name 1" column is enabled as long as the "2-Port Data" network is selected (see Single Ended tab). This network is defined by its S-parame- ters stored in a two-port Touchstone file (*.s2p).
  • Page 656 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Use the controls on the right-hand side of the dialog to define the port set and the order of the ports within the port set. Note however that the speed of the de-/embedding calculation depends on the port order.
  • Page 657 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Note: The loaded file is stored in the active recall set. Persisted recall sets contain the full (de-)embedding data so that they can be transferred to other instruments. Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId> MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId> 5.14.1.5 Balanced panel This panel allows you to activate or deactivate deembedding/embedding of balanced ports.
  • Page 658 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Active The checkboxes in the "Active" column activate or deactivate the configured de-/ embeding for the related balanced port (i.e. adds or removes it to/from the calculation flow) without changing its parameters. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt>[: STATe] CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>[:...
  • Page 659 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool This panel can also be activated by selecting the Ground Loop tab softtool tab. Refer to its description for background information, parameters and additional remote com- mands. multiple port groups (DUTs) are configured and Ground Loop per Port Group enabled, the panel displays the available port groups.
  • Page 660 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Access: Overview panel > "Impedance Renor." Active The "Active" flags are inversely related to the Use Default flags of the logical port con- figuration (see Balanced Ports dialog). "Active" "Use Default" ☑ ☐ ☐...

  • Page 661: Offset Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Active The checkboxes in the "Active" column activate or deactivate the configured differential match embedding (i.e. adds or removes it to/from the calculation flow) without chang- ing its parameters. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:DIFFerential: EMBedding<LogPt>[:STATe] File Name 1 The ellipsis button in the "File Name 1"...
  • Page 662 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool 5.14.2.1 Controls on the Offset tab Overview This button is available on all "Offset Embed" softtool tabs. It opens the Overview panel in the Offset Embed dock widget. Port Physical test port of the analyzer. You can define independent offset parameters for all ports.
  • Page 663 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<PhyPt>[:TIME] [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<PhyPt>:ELENgth [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<PhyPt>:DISTance Permittivity / Velocity Factor Defines the permittivity (ε ) and velocity factor of the dielectric in the transmission line between the reference plane and the DUT. The velocity factor is 1/sqrt(ε ) and is a measure for the velocity of light in a dielectric with permittivity ε...
  • Page 664 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool If "Adjust Time Gate" is on, the time gate is moved to left (right) when the offset-correc- ted reference plane is moved to the right (left). Its absolute position remains fixed. With this setting, it is possible, e.g., to keep the time gate at the position of the antenna con- nector while the antenna is measured at different length offsets.
  • Page 665 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Access: ● Channel – [Offset Embed] > "Offset" > "Fixture Compensation..." ● Channel – [Offset Embed] > "One Way Loss" > "Fixture Compensation..." Background Information Refer to Chapter 4.6.1.5, "Fixture Compensation", on page 205. Ports Selects the ports for whom fixture compensation data shall be acquired.
  • Page 666 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Figure 5-35: Measure Fixture dialog: Auto Length (and Loss) To acquire the necessary data, proceed as indicated in the information area. With Prompt for Each Port disabled, "Take" acquires data for all selected ports in one go.

  • Page 667: One Way Loss Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Table 5-7: Direct Compensation data Prompt for Each Port File Type Description disabled One csv trace file per standard, containing reflection traces for all selected ports; see Chap- ter 4.4.2.2, "ASCII (*.csv) files", on page 157 enabled One 1-port Touchstone file per...
  • Page 668 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Overview "Overview" on page 662. Port Physical test port of the analyzer. You can define independent loss parameters for all ports. Remote command: The <PhyPt> numeric suffix in the [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:... commands identifies the physical port. Loss at DC / Loss at 1st Freq / 1st Freq for Loss "Loss at DC / Loss at 1st Freq / 1st Freq for Loss / Use 2nd Freq / Loss at 2nd Freq / 2nd Freq for Loss"...

  • Page 669: Single Ended Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Fixture Compensation... The "Fixture Compensation..." button opens the Fixture Compensation dialog. Evaluation Range... The "Evaluation Range..." button opens the Evaluation Range dialog that allows you to restrict the frequency range of auto length (and loss) calculations. 5.14.4 Single Ended tab Allows you to specify 2-port deembedding/embedding networks for each physical port.
  • Page 670 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Figure 5-37: Offset Embed > Single Ended softtool left = 2 port data file selected for deembedding right = lumped element model selected for de-/embedding If the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the related channel (see "Fixture Simulator"...
  • Page 671 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool All Deembedding Activated Deactivates or activates all deembeddings (single-ended, balanced, port set, ground loop) for the active channel, if any. This control is only visible if Type = "Deembedding". Remote command: n.a. Network The graphical list contains all available 2-port networks: ●...

  • Page 672: Fixture Modeling Dialog

    ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool In case the port number conventions of the loaded two-port Touchstone file differ from network analyzer conventions (port 1 on the left, i.e. on the analyzer side; port 2 on the right, i.e. on the DUT side), it is possible to "Swap Gates". The analyzer will inter- change the port numbers (e.g.
  • Page 673 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Figure 5-38: Fixture modeling dialog: SFD - Single Ended Ports Figure 5-39: Fixture modeling dialog: ISD - Balanced Ports Figure 5-40: Fixture modeling dialog: EZD - Single Ended Ports User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 20...
  • Page 674 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool The fixture modeling proceeds in the following steps: 1. Measure one or more test coupons for the related fixture; see Chapter 5.14.5.2, "Measure Coupon", on page 675 The tools differ in the available coupon types. 2.
  • Page 675 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Suppress Remeasure Warnings If checked, the Measure Coupon Measure DUT + Test Fixture do not raise warn- ings, if the measurement is repeated with different ports. Remote command: n.a. Reset to Default Restores the default settings of the selected fixture modeling tool. This comprises: ●...
  • Page 676 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Coupon Type Selects the coupon type to be measured. The following coupon types are supported: "Sym 2x Thru" ✓ ✓ ✓ "1x Open" – ✓ ✓ "1x Short" – ✓ ✓ "1x Open, 1x Short" –...
  • Page 677 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Load File / 1x Open Preset / 1x Short Preset Allows you to load the coupon properties from a Touchstone file (*.s*p”). Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure:FILename:CLEar CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure:OPEN:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure:SHORt:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure:FILename:CLEar CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Ph_pt>:DUT:MEASure:FILename:CLEar Active Before starting to measure the test coupon, use these checkboxes to indicate the...
  • Page 678 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Load File Load DUT + test fixture data from file Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Ph_pt>:DUT:MEASure:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Ph_pt>:DUT:MEASure:FILename:CLEar CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:DUT:MEASure:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:DUT:MEASure:FILename:CLEar CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:DUT:MEASure:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:DUT:MEASure:FILename:CLEar Measure Starts the measurement of DUT + test fixture at the Active ports. The display area shows all the S parameter measurements being made. The resulting Touchstone file is written to C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNA\Embed- ding.
  • Page 679 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool 5.14.5.4 Save Fixture Model This section allows you to run the selected deembedding tool to generate the Touch- stone files for fixture deembedding (and the Touchstone file of the de-embedded DUT). Figure 5-41: Save Fixture Model section left = single-ended right = balanced Run <Fixture Modeling Tool>...
  • Page 680 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Note: For ISD first a batch task file Embeddingconfig_znb.abt is created and then the tool is run in batch mode (see the ISD User Guide). Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:RUN:RUN CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:RUN:RUN CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Ph_pt>:RUN:RUN Apply Use these checkboxes to indicate the ports (physical for single-ended deembedding, logical for balanced deembedding) to which the deembedding files (generated by <Fixture Modeling Tool>) shall be assigned when the dialog is closed using Apply.
  • Page 681 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Figure 5-43: Delta-L error messages 5.14.5.6 ISD Advanced Settings For details, see the ISD User Guide. User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 20...
  • Page 682 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Test Coupons > Insertion Loss Tells the ISD tool about the linearity of the 2xThru test coupon: ● "Linear": linear insertion loss ● "Non-Linear" (default): non-linear insertion loss ● "Resonant": the 2x Thru test coupon is split and used directly for deembedding This option can be more accurate if the fixture and the 2x Thru have the same impedance at every location.
  • Page 683 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Scaling for Flt Tm ← Lead Ins Overrides the lead-in’s flight time (i.e. its delay) in case the through-trace test coupon is a bit too short or too long. Default is 1. Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:SCALe:FTIMe Automatic Flt Tm for DUT + Lead Ins ←...
  • Page 684 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool ● "Ports on right": skip the ports on the right (according to the selected port sequence) ● "Manually set ports": use Ports to Skip (manual) to define the ports to be skipped Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP:NONE CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP:LEFT CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP:RIGHt...
  • Page 685 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:SCALe:FREQuency DC Extrapolation ← Calculations This setting is only active, if a recent version of the ISD tool (from 2019-12 or later) is used. If unchecked (default), the touchstone data of the generated deembedding file reach down to the start frequency of the instrument sweep.
  • Page 686 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Total Port Ordering Tells the SFD tool about the port ordering of the test fixture ● "Ports 1&3 on Left" (default): odd ports are on the left and even ports are on the right ●...

  • Page 687: Port Sets Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Ph_pt>:GENerate:SIDE<1|2> DC Extrapolation If unchecked (default), the touchstone data of the generated deembedding file reach down to the start frequency of the instrument sweep. If checked, the EZD tool adds (extrapolated) S-parameter data for f = 0. Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Ph_pt>:DCEXtrapolat Impedance Corrected/Impedance Correction Settings...
  • Page 688 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool If the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the related channel (see "Fixture Simulator" on page 600), this tab is inactive, i.e. all controls except the "Overview" button are grayed out. Overview "Overview" on page 662. Type Switches between "Deembedding"...
  • Page 689 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>: TNDefinition CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>: PARameters:C<1|2|3> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>: PARameters:L<1|2|3> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>: PARameters:R<1|2|3> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>: PARameters:G<1|2|3> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>: TNDefinition CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>: PARameters:C<1|2|3> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>: PARameters:L<1|2|3> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>: PARameters:R<1|2|3> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>: PARameters:G<1|2|3> D1, D2 The "D1" (and "D2") buttons are enabled as long as the selected deembedding/embed- ding network is defined using Touchstone files.

  • Page 690: Balanced Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool 5.14.7 Balanced tab Selects 4-port transformation networks for balanced port deembedding/embedding, defines their parameters, assigns them to a balanced port and enables embedding. Use the complementary dock widget to create Balanced panel and to activate or deac- tivate dembedding/embedding for selected balanced ports (see Chapter 5.14.1.5, "Bal- anced...
  • Page 691 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Type Switches between "Deembedding" and "Embedding" network definition. Logical Port Logical analyzer port, as defined in the "Balanced Ports" configuration. The transfor- mation networks are defined such that the physical analyzer test ports are connected to the left of the circuit;...
  • Page 692 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt>: PARameters:G<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>: TNDefinition CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>: PARameters:C<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>: PARameters:L<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>: PARameters:R<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>: PARameters:G<Cmp> D1, D2 The "D1" and "D2" buttons are enabled as long as the selected Network comprises subnetworks that are defined via two-port or four-port Touchstone files (*.s2p, *.s4p).

  • Page 693: Ground Loop Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Use the "Info" button to get additional information about the selected tool. Note: Define at least two Balanced panel before running the modeling tool. 5.14.8 Ground Loop tab Allows you to specify a 1-port ground loop deembedding/embedding network. Such a network is either defined ●...
  • Page 694 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Type Switches between "Deembedding" and "Embedding" network definition. All Deembedding Activated Deactivates or activates all deembeddings (single-ended, balanced, port set, ground loop) for the active channel, if any. This control is only visible if Type = "Deembedding".

  • Page 695: Differential Match Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Note: The loaded file is stored in the active recall set. Persisted recall sets contain the full (de-)embedding data so that they can be transferred to other instruments. Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:GLOop:DEEMbedding<group> MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:GLOop:EMBedding<group> Set to Ideal Ground This function is enabled as long as the 1-Port Data network is active.
  • Page 696 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool If the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the related channel (see "Fixture Simulator" on page 600), this tab is inactive, i.e. all controls except the "Overview" button are grayed out. Overview "Overview" on page 662. Type Currently only Differential Match"Embedding"...

  • Page 697: Config Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool ● The "Shunt L, Shunt C" network is defined by lumped elements whose parameters are displayed below the graphical list. Tip: Drag and drop the network symbols in horizontal or vertical direction to switch to the next symbol.

  • Page 698: Delta-L Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool = Default offset calculation Bottom = Offset calculation after de-/embedding (GUI mockup) Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:EDELay:VNETwork Offset > Wave De-/Embed. If checked, the firmware uses the new, wave-based de-/embedding calculation (default). Otherwise, the legacy S parameter-based calculation is used. See Chap- ter 4.1.6, "Data flow",...
  • Page 699 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool The "Delta-L Settings..." button opens the Delta-L Settings dialog, which allows you to configure a Delta-L measurement . The "Delta-L Measurement" button runs the config- ured measurement. 5.14.11.1 Delta-L Settings dialog From the "Detal-L Settings" dialog, you can set up the Delta-L measurement channel and how the external tool is run.
  • Page 700 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Method Selects the Delta-L+ characterization method to be used. Default is "Method 2L". For background information, see Delta-L 4.0 PCB characterization. "Method 1L" handles single-ended and balanced measurement results differently; acti- vate "1L Diff. Mode" for balanced measurements. For "Method 2L" and "Method 3L" measurements can also be single-ended or balanced, but the tool does not distinguish between them.
  • Page 701 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:DEFault:COUNt? CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:USER? CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:USER:COUNt? CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:USER:ADD CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:USER:DELete CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:USER:DELete:ALL Sweep Control The Delta-L measurement channel can either "Use Defaults" (10 MHz step size and 1 kHz IF bandwidth), or the "Current Sweep" settings (see "Freq Step Size" on page 489, and "Bandwidth"...
  • Page 702 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:TCONfig CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:TDR Output Settings Allows you to specify the directory where the Delta-L tool stores its data. Default is C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNA\DeltaL. If "Timestamp Filenames" is checked, the names of subsequently generated "Test Cou- pon"...
  • Page 703 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool 1L Measurement/2L Measurement/3L Measurement The settings in the "1L Measurement"/"2L Measurement"/"3L Measurement" sections configure and control the measurement of the 1st/2nd/3rd line. The "1L Measurement" is always enabled. Depending on the selected "Method" on page 700, the "2L Measurement"...
  • Page 704 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Length ← 1L Measurement/2L Measurement/3L Measurement Specifies the length of the related line. Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:M1L:LENGth CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:M2L:LENGth CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:M3L:LENGth Runs the AITT-DL tool with the collected measurement data and the configured Delta-L settings. The firmware enables this action when sufficient data for the required lines are availa- ble (either loaded or measured).
  • Page 705 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Figure 5-45: Method 2L results Markers are added to the smoothed traces at the analysis frequencies. The marker name indicates to which analysis pair it belongs and the computed Delta-L uncertainty. Method 1L For "Method 1L", the Delta-L diagram displays the following traces: ●...

  • Page 706: File Print Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S File Print softtool Markers "DeltaL1..." are added to the"StdDev" trace at the analysis frequencies. The marker names indicate the computed Delta-L uncertainties. 5.15 File Print softtool The "File Print" softtool allows you to work with recall sets and trace data. Access: System –...

  • Page 707: Recall Sets Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S File Print softtool 5.15.1 Recall sets tab A recall set comprises a set of diagrams together with the underlying system, channel, trace and display settings. It can be stored to a VNA recall set file (*.znxml|*.znx). For background information, see Chapter 4.1.2, "Softtools",...
  • Page 708 ® GUI reference R&S File Print softtool 5.15.1.1 Basic Recall Set functions To create a recall set based on the current analyzer configuration, select Save. To open an existing recall set, select Open Recall..To create an additional setup, select New.

  • Page 709: Favorites Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S File Print softtool 5.15.2 Favorites tab The "Favorites" tab allows you to manage a list of favorite recall sets. A favorite is actually a path to the related recall set, i.e. ● if the recall set is modified, then the modified recall set is loaded the next time the favorite is selected ●...

  • Page 710: Print Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S File Print softtool Favorites combo-box / Remove Use the "Favorites" combo-box to select the favorite to be removed from the list, then select "Remove" 5.15.3 Print tab The buttons on the "Print" tab allow you to send the diagrams of the active setup to an external printer, to a file or to the clipboard.

  • Page 711: Printer Setup Dialog

    ® GUI reference R&S File Print softtool Note that the diagram content to be copied can be configured in the Content tab > "Print Charts" group of the "Printer Setup" dialog. E.g., if you select "All diagrams on their own page" there, then only the content of the active diagram is copied to clip- board.
  • Page 712 ® GUI reference R&S File Print softtool The selected item in the " Print Charts" group specifies how the diagram area of the active recall set is printed. Currently the following options are offered: "No Diagram at all", "Active Diagram only", "All diagrams on one page", "All diagrams on their own page"...

  • Page 713: Trace Data Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S DUT softtool Tip: The printer settings are not affected by a preset of the R&S ZNA. Use the "Remote" tab in the System Config dialog to restore default settings. 5.15.5 Trace Data tab Chapter 5.5.11, "Trace Data tab", on page 421.

  • Page 714: Dut Centric Wizard

    ® GUI reference R&S DUT softtool Access: System – [DUT] 5.16.1 DUT Centric Wizard The "DUT Centric Wizard" guides you through the measurement setup for certain fun- damental DUT types. Access: System – [DUT] > "DUT Centric Wizard" The "DUT Centric Wizard" lets you proceed with the followng steps: 1.
  • Page 715 ® GUI reference R&S DUT softtool 4. Select the measurements to be performed. At this point, the wizard knows how many additional channels are required, and how they should be set up per default. 5. Adjust the default channel settings to your needs. 6.
  • Page 716 ® GUI reference R&S DUT softtool Save to DUT Manager Use "Save to DUT Manager" to persist new/modified mixer settings to the DUT man- ager when you proceed to the next step of the "DUT Centric Wizard". If a DUT with the same name exists, you are asked whether you want to overwrite the existing DUT con- figuration, or to create a DUT with a different name.
  • Page 717 ® GUI reference R&S DUT softtool Figure 5-46: Mixer/VNA connections Figure 5-47: Amplifier/VNA connections Which connections are actually possible, depends on the number of analyzer ports and the number of independent sources (on the VNA and connected external generators). User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 20...
  • Page 718 ® GUI reference R&S DUT softtool Measurement Selection The "Measurement Selection" page of the "DUT Centric Wizard" allows you to select the mixer properties to be measured. Channel Settings The "Channel Settings" page allows you to change the measurement channel configu- ration proposed by the "DUT Centric Wizard"...
  • Page 719 ® GUI reference R&S DUT softtool Depending on the "Measurement Selection" on page 718 either one, two, or three channels must be set up: ● one channel for S-parameter measurements ● one channel for intermodulation measurements ● one channel for group delay measurements Summary The "Summary"...
  • Page 720 ® GUI reference R&S DUT softtool 5.16.1.2 Guided amplifier setup Define DUT The "Define DUT" step allows you to specify basic properties of an amplifier or load them from the DUT Manager. Similar to the Amplifier Configuration dialog of the Manager.
  • Page 721 ® GUI reference R&S DUT softtool Save to DUT Manager Use "Save to DUT Manager" to persist new/modified mixer settings to the DUT man- ager when you proceed to the next step of the "DUT Centric Wizard". If a DUT with the same name exists, you are asked whether you want to overwrite the existing DUT con- figuration, or to create a DUT with a different name.
  • Page 722 ® GUI reference R&S DUT softtool Figure 5-48: Mixer/VNA connections Figure 5-49: Amplifier/VNA connections Which connections are actually possible, depends on the number of analyzer ports and the number of independent sources (on the VNA and connected external generators). User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 20...
  • Page 723 ® GUI reference R&S DUT softtool Measurement Selection The "Measurement Selection" page of the "DUT Centric Wizard" allows you to select the amplifier properties to be measured. Channel Settings The "Channel Settings" page allows you to change the measurement channel configu- ration proposed by the "DUT Centric Wizard"...
  • Page 724 ® GUI reference R&S DUT softtool ● one channel for intermodulation measurements Summary The "Summary" page of the "DUT Centric Wizard" ● summarizes which channels will be created and which parameters they will mea- sure ● allows you where to define these channels (new setup, append to current setup, replace current setup) ●...

  • Page 725: Dut Manager Dialog

    ® GUI reference R&S DUT softtool 5.16.2 DUT Manager dialog The DUT manager allows you to create, configure, and manage DUTs. Access: ● System – [DUT] > "DUT Meas" > "DUT Manager..." ● DUT Centric Wizard > "Define DUT" > "DUT Manager..." 5.16.2.1 Controls on the DUT Manager dialog Filter by DUT Type...
  • Page 726 ® GUI reference R&S DUT softtool Copy This button is only active, if exactly one row is selected in the table area. It allows you to copy the selected DUT. Delete This button is only active, if at least one row is selected in the table area. It allows you to delete the selected DUTs.
  • Page 727 ® GUI reference R&S DUT softtool Access: DUT Manager dialog > "Edit..." with a DUT of type "Amplifier" selected 5.16.2.3 Mixer Configuration dialog The "Mixer Configuration" dialog allows you to set up the fundamental properties of a mixer. Access: DUT Manager dialog >...

  • Page 728: Applic Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool Most of the mixer properties are straight-forward Embedded LO Select "Embedded LO" if in the related mixer measurement the LO cannot be provided by the VNA or a connected external generator. Setting this flag makes the LO drive power range read-only.

  • Page 729: External Tools Application

    ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool The "External Tools" application is always available, other applications are provided by certain software options. 5.17.1 External Tools application The "External Tools" application gives access to pre-installed and user-defined external tools. Access: System – [Applic] > "External Tools" GPIB Explorer Opens a tool that allows you to connect to the analyzer, obtain an overview of all imple- mented remote control programs, test programs, compile and run test scripts.

  • Page 730: Tdr Application

    ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool Tool 3 ... Tool 8 Allows you to add your own external tools. Any new shortcut in the C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNA\External Tools direc- tory replaces one of the buttons. Title and Bar Task Bar On Displays or hides the title bar and the task bar across the bottom of the screen. Typi- cally you can use the task bar to change between the VNA application and other exter- nal tools.
  • Page 731 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool 5.17.2.1 TDR Setup tab The "TDR Setup" tab allows you to set up the measurement for the time domain trans- formation, which is then used to analyze the time domain behavior of the DUT (eye diagram, rise time, skew, ...).
  • Page 732 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool Opens the "Balanced Ports" dialog that allows to configure the logical DUT ports (see Chapter 5.2.2.5, "Balanced Ports dialog", on page 311) ● "Stimulus..." Opens the TDR Stimulus Settings dialog that allows to configure the frequency sweep whose results are then used for the time domain transformation ●...
  • Page 733 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool Figure 5-50: Port Topology step The port configurations are the same as the ones offered on the "Predefined Config" tab of the Balanced Ports dialog. Step 2: Stimulus Settings The "Stimulus Settings" step gives access to the basic settings of the TDR Stimulus Settings dialog and allows you to select the time domain measurements to be per-...
  • Page 734 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool Once you have selected a measurement, you can finish the wizard and proceed to the Fixture Compensation dialog using the "Finish with Fixture Compensation" button. 5.17.2.3 TDR Stimulus Settings dialog This dialog allows you to configure the frequency sweep whose results are then used for the time domain transformation and subsequent TDR simulation.
  • Page 735 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool Controls in the TDR Stimulus Settings dialog Figure 5-51: TDR Stimulus Settings dialog The "TDR Stimulus Settings" dialog offers basic settings. Instead of specifying the sweep parameters directly, they are derived from time domain properties of the DUT. After the settings are made, the resulting sweep parameters are shown in the dialog.
  • Page 736 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool The velocity factor is a measure for the velocity of an electromagnetic wave in a dielec- tric with permittivity ε , relative to its velocity in a vacuum (velocity factor < 1). Permittivity and velocity factor are coupled parameters, i.e. setting one of them deter- mines the other.
  • Page 737 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool For additional settings see Chapter 5.5.5, "Time Domain tab", on page 402. Source/Receiver Settings The "RF Power" is the output power of the R&S ZNA, "IF Bandwidth" and "Average Factor" determine the operation of the related R&S ZNA receiver. For a description and related remote control commands see Chapter 5.9, "Pwr Bw Avg softtool",...
  • Page 738 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool Advanced Settings... If the active trace is an eye diagram, the "Advanced Settings..." button opens the Advanced Settings dialog that allows in-depth configuration of the simulated digital sig- nal generator and receiver. Display Measurements If the active trace is an eye diagram, the "Display Measurements"...
  • Page 739 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool The following measurement results can be selectively enabled/disabled: ● "Basic" – Eye Minimum, Eye Maximum, Eye Base, Eye Top, Eye Mean, Eye Ampli- tude, Eye Height, Eye Width For PAM signals (see "Modulation" on page 741) Eye Height and Eye Width are not available.
  • Page 740 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool Remote command: MMEMory:STORe:EYE:MEASurements 5.17.2.5 Eye Diagram dialog Allows basic configuration of the eye diagram simulation. Access: System – [Applic] > "TDR" > "Eye Diag" > "Eye Diagram..." For advanced configuration of the eye diagram simulation see Chapter 5.17.2.6, "Advanced Settings dialog",...
  • Page 741 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool Length Length of the bit stream. For a user defined Bit Stream the length can be specified in terms of bits, Kibits (2^10 bits), Mibits (2^20 bits), Gibits (2^30 bits) Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:LENGth:PRBS CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:LENGth:BITS Load Bit Stream A user-defined bit stream can be loaded from file and is repeated until the configured Length...
  • Page 742 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:MODulation High Level / Low Level Defines the highest/lowest (nominal) voltage level of the multilevel signal that is used to generate the related eye diagram. Modulation type can only be changed in the advanced "Generator Settings" dialog (see "Generator"...
  • Page 743 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool "Trace Cumulative Low Color" is the color that is used for the occurrence value 1, "Trace Cumulative High Color" is the color that is used for the most frequent occurren- ces. No occurrence (value 0) is always displayed fully transparent with the background being visible.
  • Page 744 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool Generator The "Generator Settings" dialog gives full access to the "virtual" signal generator of the related eye diagram simulation. Most of the settings are also available in the Eye Dia- gram dialog. Access: "Generator" button in the Advanced Settings dialog This dialog is available with Extended time domain analysis...
  • Page 745 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool The scrambler is a linear feedback shift register (LFSR) implementing the polynomial G(X) = X^16+X^5+X^4+X^3+1. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:STIMulus:SCRambler Emphasis The "Emphasis" dialog allows you to introduce a pre-emphasis filter to the digital signal simulated for the eye diagram measurement. This, together with Equalization, may be used to compensate for the signal integrity degradations caused by the DUT.
  • Page 746 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool Va Vb Vc Vd In dB the pre- and post cursors are defined as: ● Pre Cursor = 20 log ( Vd / Vc ) ● Post 1 Cursor = 20 log ( Vb / Va ) ●...
  • Page 747 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:EMPHasis:CURSor:PRE CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:EMPHasis:CURSor:POST<1|2> Jitter The "Define Eye Jitter" dialog allows you to add jitter to the digital signal simulated for the eye diagram measurement. Access: "Jitter" button in the Advanced Settings dialog This dialog is available with Extended time domain analysis option R&S ZNA-K20 only.
  • Page 748 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:TYPE:RANDom CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:RANDom:STDDeviation Periodic This type of jitter is determined by a sine wave whose amplitude ("Periodic Magni- tude"), frequency ("Periodic Frequency") and phase ("Periodic Phase") is specified by the user. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:TYPE:PERiodic CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:PERiodic:MAGNitude CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:PERiodic:FREQuency...
  • Page 749 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool Each value describes the jitter for a symbol transition (even when the current and the previous symbols are the same). The jitter value is implicitly given in the unit [s] and denotes the delta between the time of the ideally expected transition (given by the data rate) and the actual one.
  • Page 750 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool This dialog is available with Extended time domain analysis option R&S ZNA-K20 only. Measurement / Topolgy "Measurement / Topology" on page 740 DC Value "DC Value" on page 407 Mode Allows you to switch temporarily between the real DUT (with measured frequency response) and an ideal one (with flat frequency response).
  • Page 751 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool This dialog is available with Extended time domain analysis option R&S ZNA-K20 only. Similar to the usage of emphasis the equalization targets to improve the signal quality at the receiver end of the transmission system. The building block "Equalize" simulates a continuous-time linear equalizer (CTLE) which is typically realized as an analog cir- cuit in receivers.
  • Page 752 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool 5.17.2.7 Eye Mask Test tab If the active trace is represented as an eye diagram, the "Eye Mask Test" tab allows you to set up an eye mask for it, to enable testing against this mask and to export the test results.
  • Page 753 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:STATe CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:DATA? CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:FAIL? Mask Fail Beep This checkbox determines whether the R&S ZNA should make an audible beep on mask failures. Note: The R&S ZNA does not have a built-in audio device and loudspeaker. To hear these sounds, connect a USB audio device to the instrument or operate it via remote desktop.
  • Page 754 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool 5.17.2.8 Define Mask Configuration dialog Allows you to set up the mask the simulated eye diagram shall be tested against. Access: System – [Applic] > "TDR" > "Eye Mask Test" > "Define Mask..." There are three mask areas that can be set up for the eye diagram test: center poly- gon, top rectangle, and bottom rectangle.
  • Page 755 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool Figure 5-56: Center polygon setup: hexagon Figure 5-57: Center polygon setup: rectangle The polygon is centered at the Mask Center. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:STATe CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:TYPE CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:HORizontal CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:VERTical Top/Bottom Setup Defines and activates the top and bottom rectangles. Both rectangles are horizontally centered at the Mask Center and also their vertical off-...
  • Page 756 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool Test Settings Allows you to set the absolute or relative number of mask violations that will result in a mask fail condition. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:FAIL:CONDition CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:VIOLation:TOLerance CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:VIOLation:RATE Save / Load Mask Configuration Opens a dialog that allows to save/load the mask test configuration to/from a 7bit ASCII file (*.mask).
  • Page 757 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool 5.17.2.9 Rise Time tab The "Rise Time" tab allows you to enable and configure the Rise Time Measurement. Access: System – [Applic] > "TDR" > "Rise Time" Access: [Applic] key or "Application > Rise Time" menu Rise Time Enables/disables the rise time measurement.
  • Page 758 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:TTIMe:DATA? 5.17.2.10 Skew tab The "Skew" tab allows you to enable and configure the Skew Measurement. Access: System – [Applic] > "TDR" > "Skew" Skew Enables/disables the skew measurement between the active trace and the Reference Trace The skew measurement can only be performed if the following conditions are met for...
  • Page 759 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:STATe Reference Trace Selects the reference trace for the skew measurement. Note that the reference trace must be in the same channel as the active trace. Skew for additional conditions on both the active and the reference trace. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:TARGet Skew Position...
  • Page 760 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool Note: The R&S ZNA does not have a built-in audio device and loudspeaker. To hear these sounds, connect a USB audio device to the instrument or operate it via remote desktop. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:LIMit:FAIL:BEEP Global Check, TTL1 Pass, TTL2 Pass Chapter 5.6.1, "Limit Test tab",...

  • Page 761: Distance To Fault Application

    ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool 5.17.2.13 X Axis tab The "X Axis" tab allows you to define the x axis scaling of the active diagram. The scal- ing logic is the same as for all other diagram types, see Chapter 5.4, "Scale softtool", on page 380.
  • Page 762 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool Background information Refer to Chapter 4.7.2.7, "Distance-to-fault measurements", on page 228. 5.17.3.1 Controls on the Distance to Fault tab The controls on the "Distance to Fault" tab allow you to enable and configure a stan- dard Distance to Fault (DtF) measurement.
  • Page 763 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool If the active trace is a reflection trace S , the analyzer firmware assumes that the DUT is connected to port p=i. Otherwise it assumes that the DUT is connected to port p=2. When activating "Distance to Fault", the analyzer firmware ●...
  • Page 764 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool If "Auto Number of Points" actually modifies the Number of Points, a tooltip is dis- played: The required number of points depends on: ● the frequency span Δf = f – f (see "Start Frequency / Stop Frequency / Center stop start Frequency / Span Frequency"...
  • Page 765 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool Select "Available Cable Types..." to access the list of predefined and user-defined cable types (see Chapter 5.17.3.2, "Available Cable Types... dialog", on page 766). Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:SELect Fault Limit Check Enables/disables checking the current "Distance to Fault" trace for spikes above the given Fault Limit (red line).
  • Page 766 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool ● When the "Fault Limit" is modified, the new "Fault Limit" replaces other limit lines (see Chapter 5.6.1.2, "Define Limit Lines dialog", on page 435) ● This field is only enabled, if Fault Limit Check is active.
  • Page 767 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool For predefined cables, the table is read-only. Access: Available Cable Types... dialog > "Attenuation" column > ... Given the specified attenuation values the R&S ZNA calculates the attenuation factor at the center of the channel's sweep range and corrects the impulse response trace using this attenuation factor Attenuation (f center The frequency dependence can be defined in two alternative ways:...
  • Page 768 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:CABLe 5.17.3.3 Fault List dock widget The "Fault List" dock widget allows you to explore and save all peaks that violate the active Fault Limit. Access: [Trace] > "Distance to Fault" > "Fault List..." Figure 5-60: Fault List Dock Widget Fault Table The displays a list of all peaks that violate the active...

  • Page 769: Display Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S Display softtool The table displays the faults of the active trace (in case it is a Distance to Fault trace) . Export to File... ← Contents Opens a dialog that allows to export the (filtered) content of the fault list to an ASCII file with configurable "Field Separator"...

  • Page 770: Diagram Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Display softtool 5.18.1 Diagram tab Selects a diagram as the active diagram, defines a title, deletes or adds diagrams and arranges them on the screen. Many of the functions are unavailable if the active recall set contains only one diagram. Related settings Use the icons in the toolbar to add diagrams and traces.
  • Page 771 ® GUI reference R&S Display softtool Add Trace + Diagram Creates a diagram and a trace which is displayed in the new diagram. The trace is cre- ated with the channel settings of the previous active trace but with default trace set- tings.
  • Page 772 ® GUI reference R&S Display softtool Show Title Displays or hides the title area of the active diagram. This property can only be set if Title is non-empty. If "Title" is empty, the title area is always hidden Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TITLe[:STATe] Overlay All Places all traces in a single diagram area which is maximized to occupy the whole...

  • Page 773: Split Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Display softtool Tip: To vary the size and position of the diagram areas, drag and drop the separating frames or use the functions in the "Split" tab. Remote command: DISPlay:LAYout:SPLit 5.18.2 Split tab Arranges multiple diagrams on the screen. Some of the "Split"...
  • Page 774 ® GUI reference R&S Display softtool ● "Split All" on page 772 Dual Split / Triple Split / Quad Split Splits the diagram area into two (three / four) diagrams and distributes the traces among the diagrams. Traces with different format and channel settings (e.g. Cartesian and complex diagrams) are separated, if possible.

  • Page 775: Config Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Display softtool If the selected number of "Diagrams" exceeds the number of traces, some of the new diagrams are created with a default trace. Tip: To vary the size and position of the diagrams, drag and drop the separating frames or use the functions in the "Diagram"...
  • Page 776 ® GUI reference R&S Display softtool 5.18.3.1 Controls on the Config tab Color Scheme Controls the colors in the diagram areas. Color schemes are global settings and apply to all active recall sets. The following predefined color schemes are optimized for the analyzer screen and for color hardcopies, respectively: ●...
  • Page 777 ® GUI reference R&S Display softtool "User Define..." opens a dialog to modify the predefined schemes, changing the colors and styles of the individual display elements. Chapter 5.18.3.2, "Define User Color Scheme dialog", on page 778. Remote command: SYSTem:DISPlay:COLor Hide Sensitive Information Unmasks or masks all stimulus value occurrences in the VNA GUI for the current recall set.
  • Page 778 ® GUI reference R&S Display softtool Remote command: No command; display configuration only. Info Window Shows/hides the Info Window Remote command: DISPlay:IWINdow[:STATe] Font Size Scales the fonts in the diagrams. The scaling affects the trace and channel lists, and the info fields. Remote command: DISPlay:RFSize Auto Adjust Windows...
  • Page 779 ® GUI reference R&S Display softtool Element Selects the screen element to be modified. The list contains the background and all traces (more precisely trace properties), text elements and lines in the diagrams. The maximum number of trace properties can be configured in the "User Interface" tab of the "System Config"...
  • Page 780 ® GUI reference R&S Display softtool Limit Test > Colorize Trace when Failed Assigns a different trace color to failed trace segments. The different color reaches from the last passed measurement point before the start of the failed segment to the last failed measurement point in the segment. Consequently, the colorized trace segment can begin before the begin of the failed range and can end before its end.
  • Page 781 ® GUI reference R&S Display softtool Remote command: DISPlay:CMAP:MARKer[:STATe] General > Black White Scheme / Line Styles Scheme / Light Scheme Modifies the user color scheme, in particular the trace and channel lines, in a prede- fined way. As an alternative, select predefined color schemes; see "Color Scheme"...
  • Page 782 ® GUI reference R&S Display softtool If a trace is hidden, then its marker and bandfilter search info is also hidden in the "Info Window". Info Window Configuration dialog The "Info Window Configuration" dialog allows you to select the markers and Display elements of a diagram results to be displayed in the...

  • Page 783: View Bar Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Display softtool Figure 5-62: Content selection: bandfilter search info fields Remote command: DISPlay:IWINdow:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] DISPlay:IWINdow:BFILter[:STATe] 5.18.4 View Bar tab Displays or hides information panels and bars of the graphical user interface. Hiding the information elements leaves more space for the diagrams. All elements can be shown or hidden simultaneously.

  • Page 784: Touchscreen Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Display softtool Hard Key Panel Toggles the visibility of the "Hard Key Panel". For background information, see Chapter 3.3.2.6, "Hardkey panel", on page 57. The "Hard Key Panel" can also be closed via the "X" button in its top right corner. Remote command: SYSTem:DISPlay:BAR:HKEY[:STATe] Title Bar Task Bar...

  • Page 785: Setup Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool ● Lock screen – all control elements are locked. Pressing any front panel key on the analyzer (or sending SYSTem:TSLock OFF) re-enables touchscreen control. Remote command: SYSTem:TSLock 5.19 Setup softtool The "Setup" softtool allows you to define various system-related settings, to manage global resources, to get system information and to execute service functions.
  • Page 786 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool ● "Service Function...": Service Function dialog Language Selects the language of the graphical user interface. A message box indicates that the vector network analyzer application needs to be restarted to activate a different lan- guage.
  • Page 787 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool ● Presets tab......................787 ● Calibration tab....................... 788 ● User Interface tab....................791 ● Messages tab......................793 ● Channel Bits tab....................794 ● Advanced tab......................795 ● Power tab......................797 ● Recovery tab......................800 ● HUMS tab......................801 Presets tab Specifies the behavior of the R&S ZNA upon a preset.

  • Page 788: Calibration Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Global Settings The two buttons reset all directory settings (e.g. the directories for storing trace data, limit lines, calibration data...) and all settings in the "Printer Setup" dialog to default val- ues. See Chapter 5.15.4, "Printer Setup dialog", on page 711.
  • Page 789 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Auto Power Setting for Cal Unit Sets the source power at all test ports to -10 dBm while an automatic calibration is active. Applying this source power to the ports of the calibration unit ensures best accuracy of the automatic calibration.
  • Page 790 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Note that for this to work, the port assignments must have a star topology, with a "Common Port" set using [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:CPORt on page 1282. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:MCONnect Same Sweep Setup for All Standards Selects one of two alternative calibration methods: ●...

  • Page 791: User Interface Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Interpolation is used if the sweep points during the measurement differ from the sweep points during calibration (state label "Cal int"). Compared to the default linear interpola- tion, the "Higher Order" (cubic spline) interpolation can slightly slow down the mea- surement but can provide better results, at least if the measured trace shows no signifi- cant noise or discontinuities.
  • Page 792 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Transparent Info Fields This checkbox enables or disables transparent info fields for markers and trace statis- tics. Transparent info fields do not hide an underlying trace. Remote command: n.a. Show Sweep Symbols This checkbox turns sweep symbols on or off. Sweep symbols are arrows pointing downward onto the trace.

  • Page 793: Messages Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Decimal Places Defines the number of fractional digits for quantities with different physical units. The settings affect entries and results, e.g. the values in the marker lists. Note: If your instrument is equipped with option R&S ZNA-K19, 1 mHz Frequency Resolution, set "Decimal Places"...

  • Page 794: Channel Bits Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Remote command: SYSTem:ERRor:DISPlay:STATe Show Info Messages / Show Warning Messages / Show Error Messages Selectively disables/enables display of information popups for the related event type. If information popups are globally switched off (Show Instrument Messages unchecked), these buttons are disabled.

  • Page 795: Advanced Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Channel Bits (Decimal) Entry of the 8-bit decimal value (0 ... 255) for the selected channel. The channel bits control eight output signals at the User Port connector. The signals are 3.3 V TTL sig- nals which can be used to differentiate between up to 256 independent analyzer states.
  • Page 796 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Geometric Calculation of Bandfilter Center Defines how bandfilter searches calculate the center frequency of the passband or stopband (see "Bandfilter search" on page 106). If "Geometric Calculation of Bandfilter Center" is checked, the geometric mean of the lower band edge and upper band edge frequencies is used, otherwise their arithmetic mean.

  • Page 797: Power Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool ● positive and negative numbers are vertically aligned by prefixing positive numbers with blanks ● the frequencies are horizontally separated from the corresponding S matrices using leading spaces ● the content parts (header, S matrices for different frequencies) are separated by blank lines Use TAB (instead of blanks) ←...
  • Page 798 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Power Reduction at Sweep End The power reduction settings apply to all sweep modes but are particularly useful in single sweep mode. Power Keep Settling Delay Auto Reduce End Measurement Restart Sweep Time Figure 5-63: Power control at sweep end in Single Sweep mode (power sweep) Note: By default, at sweep end the output power of the first measurement point is restored ("Auto"...
  • Page 799 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Power Mode at Sweep End ← Power Reduction at Sweep End The analyzer offers three power modes at sweep end: ● "Auto" results in the shortest measurement time (default setting). If enabled, at sweep end the output power of the first measurement point is restored. The config- ured Settling Delay is not applied.

  • Page 800: Recovery Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool RF Off Behavior Allows you to define how the R&S ZNA turns the RF power off. "RF Switch Only the RF switch is used. Only (Fast), Default" "RF Switch In addition to the switches, all amplifiers are turned off. Results in and Amp.

  • Page 801: Hums Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool HUMS tab The "HUMS" tab allows you to enable and configure R&S HUMS (see Chapter 4.7.18, "Health and usage monitoring service (HUMS)", on page 272). It is only available if software option R&S ZNA-K980 is installed. Common controls State (Device Utilization)/Status Enables/disables the HUMS service.
  • Page 802 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Depending on the enabled versions, different parts of the Protocol subtab are enabled. Note: If you activate v2c, version v1 is also active. Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:SNMP:VERSion Delete HUMS History Allows you to delete the previousy collected health and monitoring information from the instrument.
  • Page 803 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool ● To add a new user, select the "Add" button, enter the data and create the user by selecting the "✓" icon. ● To delete a single user, select the trash icon in the corresponding row. ●...
  • Page 804 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool 5.19.1.3 Info dialog The "Info" dialog displays information about the instrument and its operation. All func- tions are primarily intended for error diagnostic and service purposes; see Chapter 9.3, "Collecting information for technical support", on page 1634.
  • Page 805 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Create R&S Support Information Saves the current selftest results to a zipped report file you can send to R&S Support for fault diagnosis; see Chapter 9.3, "Collecting information for technical support", on page 1634. Remote command: DIAGnostic:DEVice:STATe SYSTem:DFPRint?
  • Page 806 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Options Tab Shows the installed software and hardware options. You can also enable additional software options using the option key supplied with the option. Proceed according to the instructions in the dialog. For an overview of options, refer to Chapter 4.7, "Optional extensions and accesso- ries", on page 219.
  • Page 807 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Software Option Info Software options are listed with their name and description, the option key and key type, and the activation and expiration date (if applicable). Remote command: DIAGnostic:PRODuct:OPTion:INFO? Hardware Tab Gives an overview of the analyzer's hardware configuration and basic hardware-related instrument settings.
  • Page 808 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Selftest Tab Allows to run an automatic selftest on the analyzer, and to displays its results. Check "Show Details" to see the detailed test results. Error Log Tab Contains a chronological record of errors that occurred in the current and in previous sessions (see Chapter 9.1, "Errors during firmware operation",...
  • Page 809 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Lost Trigger Tab Displays the lost trigger events that occurred in the current and in previous VNA ses- sions ("lost trigger event log"). For each sweep with at least one lost trigger event, a log entry is created. The time- stamp of an entry indicates the end time of the related sweep.
  • Page 810 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Remote command: TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LTRigger[:STATe] Service Tab Allows you to read or specify service-related information. This information can be read R&S HUMS, however, it does not require the corresponding option R&S ZNA-K980. Next Calibration Due The date (and time) the instrument needs calibration to be done. Remote command: DIAGnostic:SERVice:CALibration:DUE:DATE Recommended Calibration Interval...

  • Page 811: Freq. Ref. Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Most of the service functions require a service level > 0 that is protected by a pass- word. Those service functions should be used by a Rohde & Schwarz service repre- sentative only. Refer to the service manual for more information. Password Enter a password here to activate the required service level.
  • Page 812 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Reference Source Selects the internal or an external reference clock signal for synchronization. "Internal" The analyzer synchronizes to its internal reference oscillator. The synchronized internal 10 MHz reference clock is also made avail- able at the rear panel Reference Out BNC connector. In addition, a synchronized 100 MHz reference signal can be provided at the Refer- ence In/Out SMA connector (see "Reference I/O (SMA) >...

  • Page 813: Remote Settings Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Reference Clock Source "Reference Out (BNC)" "Internal" 10 MHz "External (BNC)" 10 MHz "External (SMA)" Ext Frequency Specifies the frequency of the external reference clock signal at Reference In. Remote command: [SENSe:]ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency Reference I/O (SMA) > Out Defines whether a 100 MHz reference clock signal is output to the Reference In/Out SMA connector.
  • Page 814 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool 5.19.3.1 Controls on the Remote Settings tab IP Address Displays the current IP4 address of the R&S ZNA. By default, the analyzer is config- ured to use dynamic TCP/IP configuration (DHCP) and obtain all IP address informa- tion automatically.
  • Page 815 If the DEFAULT language is activated, the factory ID string Rohde&Schwarz,ZNA<Max. Freq>-<Ports>Port,<Order and Serial No>,<FW_Ver- sion> (e.g. Rohde-Schwarz,ZNA26-4Port,1332450024100005,1.50.2.19) is set. The option string is a comma-separated list of all installed software and hardware options. The bit order for transferred binary data is swapped (FORMat:BORDer SWAPped).

  • Page 816: Power Meter Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool ● "Auto-Align Logical Ports" determines the logical port creation logic. If enabled (default), logical ports are aligned and must be set from low to high port (which was the only possibility prior to firmware V1.91). If set to disabled, new ports can be created freely, like in manual operation.
  • Page 817 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool 5.19.4.1 Controls on the Power Meter tab The buttons in the "Power Meter" tab open the following dialogs: ● "Power Meters...", see Chapter 5.19.4.2, "External Power Meters dialog", on page 817 ● "Power Meter Config...", see Chapter 5.19.4.3, "External Power Meter Config dia- log", on page 821...
  • Page 818 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool The configuration of a new external power meter involves the following steps: 1. Connect the power meter to your R&S ZNA using a LAN (VXI-11), GPIB, or USB interface. 2. If the power meter is connected via LAN, enable LAN Detection 3.
  • Page 819 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Configured Devices Table with all power meters in use with their properties. Except for the auto-detected Known Devices, to appear in the table of "Configured Devices" a power sensor/meter must have been configured manually using Device.
  • Page 820 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool LAN Detection Activate "LAN Detection" to include the LAN interface in the autodetection sequence (see Scan Instruments). Note: "LAN detection" only works for external devices on the IP subnet with the R&S ZNA. As a prerequisite, the R&S ZNA must accept incoming connections on UDP port 2473. If necessary, add a corresponding inbound rule to your firewall settings.
  • Page 821 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool power meters can be auto-configured; for manual configuration use the serial num- ber ("V" number) of the power meter's measurement head. If an instrument is connected to the R&S ZNA, the entries in the [Driver for New Instrument] panel can be auto-detected for the specified interface type and address.

  • Page 822: Generator Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Deembed Two-Port (All Channels) Reads and modifies the state of the built-in S-parameter correction that is available on certain R&S®NRP-Z power sensors. See Application Note 1GP70 "Using S-Parame- ters with R&S®NRP-Z Power Sensors" for background information. This Application Note is available on the Rohde &...
  • Page 823 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Log Errors Enables the transfer of error messages for external devices (e.g. connection errors) to the error log. The error log appears in the "Info" dialog; see Chapter 5.19.1.3, "Info dia- log", on page 804. Remote command: 5.19.5.2 External Generators dialog...
  • Page 824 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool If the R&S ZNA fails to detect a connected generator, ► Click "Add Device" to define the interface type and address. The R&S ZNA can auto-detect the instrument type (driver) and the serial number of the connected generator.
  • Page 825 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool – Self test error In this case enable error logging for external devices (see "Log Errors" on page 817), and search the Error Log Tab for self test error codes of the device. ● –...
  • Page 826 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool ● "Interface" selects an interface/protocol type for the connection. In addition to the GPIB, VXI-11, SOCKET, and USB-VISA interface types (for devices connected to the GPIB Bus, LAN or USB connectors of the analyzer; see Table 5-10), the ana- lyzer supports any "Other"...

  • Page 827: Frequency Converter Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Physical Interface Address Remarks interface (protocol) (connector) USB-VISA <ManID>::<ProdID>::<SerialNo> 2733 (0x0AAD) is the manufacturer ID of Rohde & Schwarz. e.g. 0x0AAD::0x0047::100098 71 (0x0047) is an example for a R&S prod- uct ID (R&S SMF100A). The serial number is device-specific.
  • Page 828 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool 5.19.6.1 Converter Configuration dialog In the "Converter Configuration" dialog, you can define the converter topology, i.e. which converter types are used, and how they are connected to the R&S ZNA (and possibly external generators). Converter <i>...
  • Page 829 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool IF Frequency Defines the intermediate frequency at the related port. Defaults to the of the selected Converter Type. If you specify an IF below 28 MHz, then during spectrum measurements the firmware automatically adjusts the IF to 31.25 MHz. Remote command: [SENSe:]CONVerter<Port>:IFRequency IF Input...
  • Page 830 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Splitter <i> The source of the LO signal distributed via splitter <i>. If two or more converters are used in a measurement, it is recommended to distribute a single LO signal to all involved converters using a splitter. The corresponding configu- ration is to select the suitable LO source here and set Local to "Splitter <i>".
  • Page 831 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Initially a set of preconfigured converter types is available, mainly comprising the leg- acy converter models R&S ZVA-Zxxx(E). To define your own converter types, proceed as follows: 1. Use "Add" to create a converter type with default properties or use "Copy" to dupli- cate the properties of the converter type whose tab is currently selected.
  • Page 832 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Source: Converter Max. Power Defines the maximum tolerable input power at the RF In port of the converter. Remote command: [SENSe:]CONVerter:DEFinition:MPOWer Local Port: Multiplicator Defines the source multiplicator, i.e. the factor by which the incoming LO frequency is multiplied by the converter.
  • Page 833 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Cable & Splitter Loss Defines the loss of ● the cables for source ports ● the cables and the splitter (if used) for LO ports With Apply to all channels in all setups (or after a [Preset]), these values are written to Port Power Offset of the respective ports.
  • Page 834 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Access:: ● System – [Setup] > "Frequency Converter" > "Leveling Dataset..." ● Channel – [Cal] > "Use Cal" > "Active Power Cals..." Background Information Chapter 4.7.7.1, "Leveling", on page 254. Power Control Select whether you want activate converter power control, if a leveling dataset is avail- able.

  • Page 835: Port Setup Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool 5.19.7 Port Setup tab Collects functions for the (re) definition of internal and external physical ports and their signal paths. 5.19.7.1 Controls on the Port Setup tab Define Ports... Opens a dialog that allows you to redefine the physical VNA ports. See Chap- ter 5.19.7.2, "Define Physical Ports dialog",...

  • Page 836: Generic Device Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool a wave, b wave, Source Define a physical port by assigning its reference receiver, measurement receiver and generator, respectively. The receivers and generators can be freely assigned, but without reusing the same (original) physical port in different (redefined) ports. Remote command: [SENSe:]UDSParams<Pt>:PARam [SENSe:]UDSParams:ACTive...
  • Page 837 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Access: System – [Setup] > "Generic Device" > "Generic Device..." Background information Refer to Chapter 4.7.40, "Generic devices", on page 292. The configuration of a new generic device involves the following steps: 1. Connect the device to your R&S ZNA using a LAN (VXI-11), GPIB, or USB inter- face.
  • Page 838 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool For devices that are not autoconfigured by the analyzer firmware, "+" copies the device to the table of Configured Devices. Remote command: Configured Devices Table with all generators in use with their properties. The properties of manually config- ured devices (using Device) can be changed in the dialog.
  • Page 839 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool The connection is defined with the following settings: ● "Interface" selects an interface/protocol type for the connection. In addition to the VXI-11, SOCKET, and GPIB interfaces, the analyzer supports any "Other" interface supported by the installed VISA library. USB-VISA devices are auto-detected and hence this interface type does not show up here.
  • Page 840 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Physical Interface Address Remarks interface (protocol) (connector) USB-VISA <ManID>::<ProdID>::<SerialNo> 2733 (0x0AAD) is the manufacturer ID of Rohde & Schwarz. e.g. 0x0AAD::0x0047::100098 The serial number is device-specific. LAN or USB Other Interface-specific, e.g. for SOCKET: Use complete VISA resource string.

  • Page 841: Help Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S Help softtool ● The recall set only stores the paths of the command files, but not their contents. When loading the recall set, the referenced command files must be available at the same locations. ● In case loading a command file fails, the Error Log provides more information.

  • Page 842: Preset Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S Preset softtool Open the Info dialog for full information about the instrument. 5.21 Preset softtool Access: ● System – [Preset] ● Menu bar: "Channel" > "Preset" > "Select Preset" > (various menu items) 5.21.1 Select Preset tab The controls on the "Select Preset"...
  • Page 843 ® GUI reference R&S Preset softtool More preset options are available via the Presets tab of the "System Config" dialog. Preset Executes the configured preset action. See "Normal / RF Off / Normal, GUI, Ext Setup / <File Name>" on page 843. Normal / RF Off / Normal, GUI, Ext Setup / <File Name>...
  • Page 844 ® GUI reference R&S Preset softtool Remote command: n.a. Save Preset File... Lets you save the current setup to a recall set file and to select it as user preset file one go. Opens a standard "Save File" dialog. Remote command: MMEMory:STORe:STATe 1,<RecallSetFile>...

  • Page 845: Remote Control

    ® Remote control R&S Introduction to remote control 6 Remote control This chapter provides instructions on how to set up the analyzer for remote control, a general introduction to remote control of programmable instruments, and the descrip- tion of the analyzer's remote control concept. For reference information about all remote control commands implemented by the instrument, complemented by compre- hensive program examples, refer to Chapter 7, "Command...

  • Page 846: Remote Control Via Usb

    2-port R&S ZNB67: 0x0253 ● 4-port R&S ZNB67: 0x0254 Hence a possible resource string for the 4-port R&S ZNA26 is USB1::0x0AAD:: 0x0199::100067::INSTR. 6.1.2 Starting a remote control session A remote control program must open a connection to the analyzer (using VISA func- tionality), before it can send commands to the analyzer and receive device responses (e.g.

  • Page 847: Gpib Explorer

    ® Remote control R&S Introduction to remote control The following tools can make remote control more comfortable and faster: ● Various software tools provide an easy-to-use graphical user interface for remote control. An example is the "GPIB Explorer" (also termed "IECWIN32") which is pre- installed on the analyzer.
  • Page 848 ® Remote control R&S Introduction to remote control ● RSIB, VISA (TCPIP) and VISA (HSLIP) (for LAN connection, requires an appropri- ate IP or local host address); see Chapter 12.1.2.1, "Assigning an IP address", on page 1640. ● VISA (USB) Depending on the instrument model and variant, specify the resource string as USB1::0x0AAD::<Device ID>::<Serial>::INSTR (see Chapter 6.1.1,...

  • Page 849: Switchover To Remote Control

    ® Remote control R&S Introduction to remote control 6.1.4 Switchover to remote control On power-up, the instrument is always in the manual operating state and can be oper- ated via the front panel controls. The instrument is switched to remote control when it receives a command from the controller.
  • Page 850 ® Remote control R&S Introduction to remote control Switching on the display is ideal for program test purposes but tends to slow down the measurement. Therefore, it is recommended to switch off the display in real measure- ment applications where a tested program script is to be executed repeatedly. The analyzer provides a third display option where the measurement screen is only updated when triggered by the remote control command SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate ONCE.

  • Page 851: Combining Manual And Remote Control

    ® Remote control R&S Introduction to remote control 6.1.4.1 Setting the device address The GPIB address (primary address) of the instrument is factory-set to 20. It can be changed manually in the System – [Setup] > "Remote Settings" tab or via remote con- trol.

  • Page 852: Messages

    ® Remote control R&S Messages 6.2 Messages The messages transferred on the data lines of the GPIB bus or via the RSIB / VXI-11 protocol can be either interface messages or device messages. For a description of interface messages refer to the relevant sections: ●...
  • Page 853 ® Remote control R&S Messages SCPI compatibility The analyzers are compatible to the final SCPI version 1999.0. Not all the commands supported by the instrument are taken from the SCPI standard (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments), however, their syntax follows SCPI rules. The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488.2 and aims at the standardization of instru- ment-control commands, error handling and the status registers.
  • Page 854 ® Remote control R&S Messages The following rules simplify and abbreviate the command syntax: ● Multiple mnemonics Some mnemonics occur on several levels within one command system. Their effect depends on the structure of the command, i. e. on the position in the com- mand header they are inserted in.
  • Page 855 ® Remote control R&S Messages Several commands in a command line must be separated by a semicolon ;". If the next command belongs to a different command system, the semicolon is followed by a colon. Example: TRIGger:SOURce EXTernal;:SENSe:FREQuency:STARt 1GHZ This command line contains two commands. The first command belongs to the TRIGger system and defines the trigger source (external trigger).

  • Page 856: Scpi Parameters

    ® Remote control R&S Messages Example: TRIGger:SOURce? Response: IMM 6.2.3 SCPI parameters Many commands are supplemented by a parameter or a list of parameters. The parameters must be separated from the header by a "white space". Permissible parameters are numerical values, Boolean parameters, text, character strings and block data.
  • Page 857 ® Remote control R&S Messages Unless it is explicitly stated in the command description, you can use the special numeric parameters for all commands of the analyzer. 6.2.3.2 Boolean parameters Boolean parameters represent two states. The ON state (logically true) is represented by ON or a numerical value different from 0.

  • Page 858: Basic Remote Control Concepts

    ® Remote control R&S Basic remote control concepts 6.2.3.6 Overview of syntax elements The colon separates the mnemonics of a command. In a command line, the separating semicolon marks the uppermost command level. The semicolon separates two commands of a command line. It does not alter the path. The comma separates several parameters of a command.

  • Page 859: Active Traces In Remote Control

    ® Remote control R&S Basic remote control concepts Create new trace and new channel CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine '<Trace Name>', '< Meas Parameter> (if channel <Ch> does not exist yet) Delete trace CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete '<Trace Name>' Create or delete channel CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>[:STATe] ON | OFF Create or delete diagram area DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:STATe ON | OFF Display trace in diagram area...

  • Page 860: Initiating Measurements, Speed Considerations

    ® Remote control R&S Basic remote control concepts Example: *RST Reset the analyzer, creating channel no. 1 with the default trace "Trc1". The trace is displayed in diagram area no. 1. CALC1:PAR:SDEF 'Trc2', 'S11'; DISP:WIND:TRAC2:FEED 'Trc2' Create a new trace named "Trc2", assigned to channel no. 1 (the suffix 1 after CALC, may be omitted), and display the trace.

  • Page 861: Addressing Traces And Channels

    ® Remote control R&S Basic remote control concepts Example: *RST; :INITiate:CONTinuous:ALL OFF Activate single sweep mode for all channels (including the channels created later). INITiate1:IMMediate; *WAI Start a single sweep in channel no. 1, wait until the sweep is terminated before pro- ceeding to the next command (see Chapter 6.4, "Command processing",...

  • Page 862: Command Processing

    ® Remote control R&S Command processing Method Commands / Example Assign or query trace name of a trace numbered CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:NAME 'ABCD' <Trc> CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:NAME? (returns 'ABCD') Query trace number assigned to a trace named CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:NAME:ID? 'ABCD' 'ABCD' (returns the actual trace number; the trace suffix is ignored) Table 6-3: Mixed commands Method...

  • Page 863: Command Recognition

    ® Remote control R&S Command processing nition when the input buffer is full or when it receives a delimiter, <PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR>, as defined in IEEE 488.2, or the interface message DCL. If the input buffer is full, the message data traffic is stopped and the data received up to then is processed.

  • Page 864: Status Reporting System

    ® Remote control R&S Command processing Before passing on the data to the hardware, the settling bit in the STATus:OPERation register is set (see Chapter 6.5.3.4, "STATus:OPERation", on page 872). The hard- ware executes the settings and resets the bit again as soon as the new state has set- tled.
  • Page 865 ® Remote control R&S Command processing :FREQ:STAR 1GHZ;SPAN 100 :FREQ:STAR? always returns 1000000000 (1 GHz). When: :FREQ:STAR 1GHz;STAR?;SPAN 1000000 is sent, however, the result is not specified by SCPI. The result could be the value of STARt before the command was sent since the instrument might defer executing the individual commands until a program message terminator is received.

  • Page 866: Status Reporting System

    ® Remote control R&S Status reporting system Command Action after the hardware has settled Programming the controller *WAI Stops further command processing until all commands Send *WAI directly after the command which sent before *WAI have been executed should be terminated before the next command is executed.

  • Page 867: Overview Of Status Registers

    ® Remote control R&S Status reporting system SRE register The service request enable register SRE can be used as ENABle part of the STB if the STB is structured according to SCPI. By analogy, the ESE can be used as the ENABle part of the ESR.
  • Page 868 ® Remote control R&S Status reporting system most significant bit) is set to zero for all parts. Thus the contents of the register parts can be processed by the controller as positive integer. The sum bit is obtained from the EVENt and ENABle part for each register. The result is then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of the higher-order register.

  • Page 869: Contents Of The Status Registers

    ® Remote control R&S Status reporting system NTRansition The Negative TRansition part also acts as a transition filter. When a bit of the CONDi- tion part is changed from 1 to 0, the associated NTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1.
  • Page 870 ® Remote control R&S Status reporting system ● The STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2> register indicates the result of the limit check. ● The STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity register monitors hardware failures of the analyzer. 6.5.3.1 STB and SRE The STatus Byte (STB) provides a rough overview of the instrument status by collect- ing the pieces of information of the lower registers.
  • Page 871 ® Remote control R&S Status reporting system Related common commands The STB is read out using the command *STB? or a Serial poll. The SRE can be set using command *SRE and read using *SRE? . 6.5.3.2 IST flag and PPE In analogy to the Service request (SRQ), the Individual STatus (IST) flag combines the...
  • Page 872 ® Remote control R&S Status reporting system Bit No. Meaning Execution error This bit is set if a received command is syntactically correct, but cannot be performed for other reasons. An error message with a number between –200 and –300, which describes the error in greater detail, is entered into the error queue.
  • Page 873 ® Remote control R&S Status reporting system STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2>[:EVENt]? STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit1 is also the summary register of the lower level STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit2 register. The bits in the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit1 register are defined as follows: Bit No. Meaning LIMit2 register summary This bit is set if a bit is set in the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit2 register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1.
  • Page 874 ® Remote control R&S Status reporting system Refer to the Chapter 9, "Error messages and troubleshooting", on page 1632 for a detailed description of hardware errors including possible remedies. The bits in the STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity register are defined as follows. Bit No. Meaning HARDware register summary This bit is set if a bit is set in the STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:HARDware register and...

  • Page 875: Application Of The Status Reporting System

    ® Remote control R&S Status reporting system Bit No. Meaning Unstable level control This bit is set if the analyzer detects an excessive source level at one of the ports. The signal is turned off and the sweep halted. Check signal path for the received wave, especially check external components. Then restart the sweep (INITiate<Ch>[:IMMediate]).
  • Page 876 ® Remote control R&S Status reporting system 6.5.4.1 Service request The R&S ZNA can send a service request (SRQ) to the controller. Usually this service request causes an interrupt, to which the control program can react appropriately. Initiating an SRQ As shown in section Overview of status registers, an SRQ is initiated if one or several...
  • Page 877 ® Remote control R&S Status reporting system 3. Query STAT:QUES:LIMit1:EVENT? (query STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit1 register) If bit 1 is set, then the first trace failed the limit check. The SRQ is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own. Each controller program should set the instrument such that a service request is initiated in the case of malfunction.

  • Page 878: Reset Values Of The Status Reporting System

    ® Remote control R&S Status reporting system Queries are usually used after an SRQ to obtain more detailed information on its cause. Decimal representation of a bit pattern The STB and ESR registers contain 8 bits, the SCPI registers 16 bits. The contents of a status register is keyed and transferred as a single decimal number.
  • Page 879 ® Remote control R&S Status reporting system Event Switching on DCL, SDC *RST or STA- *CLS supply voltage (Device Tus:PRE- SYS- Power-On-Status- Clear, Tem:PRE- Clear Selected Set:ALL Device Clear) Clear EVENt parts of the reg- isters Clear ENABle parts of all OPERation and QUESTiona- ble registers, Fill ENABle parts of all other...

  • Page 880: Command Reference

    ® Command reference R&S Special terms and notation 7 Command reference This chapter describes all common commands and SCPI commands implemented by the analyzer. Validity of the command set The commands reported in this chapter are valid for vector network analyzers with any number of ports.

  • Page 881: Upper- Vs. Lower-Case

    ® Command reference R&S Special terms and notation 7.1.1 Upper- vs. lower-case Upper-/lower-case characters characterize the long and short form of the mnemonics in a command. The short form consists of all uppercase characters, the long form of all uppercase plus all lowercase characters. It is recommended to use either the short form or the long form;...

  • Page 882: Common Commands

    The Identification Query response is of the form Rohde-Schwarz,ZNA<Max. Freq>-<Ports>Port,<Order and Serial No.>,<FW_Version>, e.g. Rohde-Schwarz,ZNA26-4Port,1332450024100005,1.50.1.42. The IDN information is editable; see "Define *IDN + *OPT..." on page 815. *IST? –...

  • Page 883: Scpi Command Reference

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Command Parameters / Remarks Short Description *OPT? – Queries the options included in the instrument and returns a list of the options installed. The response consists of arbitrary ASCII response data according to OPTion identification query only IEEE 488.2.

  • Page 884: Calculate Commands

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference ● MMEMory commands..................1176 ● OUTPut commands.....................1217 ● PROGram commands..................1222 ● [SENSe:] commands...................1225 ● SOURce commands................... 1408 ● STATus commands..................... 1480 ● SYSTem commands....................1483 ● TRACe commands....................1519 ● TRIGger commands....................1522 ● New commands for R&S ZNA................1532 7.3.1 CALCulate commands The CALCulate...
  • Page 885 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference to select the CalU standard to be used CALCulate:CALValidate:STANdard for the validation. Parameters: <String> *RST: 'Factory' Manual operation: "Characterization" on page 557 CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:MAGNitude:LOWer <Port>, <Value> CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:MAGNitude:UPPer <Port>, <Value> Defines the maximum magnitude deviations from the reference characterization S- parameters that are allowed during cal validation.
  • Page 886 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <Standard> OPEN | SHORt | MATCh 7.3.1.3 CALCulate:DATA... The CALCulate:DATA... commands provide access to the results of a measure- ment. Data format The trace data is transferred in either ASCII or block data (REAL) format, depending on the setting.

  • Page 887: Calculate:data:all

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate:DATA:DALL? <Format> Reads the current response values of all data traces of the current recall set. Use to query data traces and memory traces. CALCulate:DATA:ALL? Query parameters: <Format> FDATa | SDATa | MDATa Output format for the S-parameter data, see CALCulate<Chn>:DATA.
  • Page 888 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference If a full n-port system error correction is active in the related channel, the command reads the full nxn S-matrix of the calibrated ports (there is no need to create or display the S-parameter traces). Use to query the CALCulate<Ch>:DATA:CALL:CATalog? available traces.

  • Page 889: Calculate:data:dall

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Ch>:DATA:CALL:CATalog? Returns all traces which are available for in channel CALCulate<Ch>:DATA:CALL no. <Ch>. The response is a string parameter with all S-parameter traces in the current channel or in the active system error correction; see example. Suffix: <Ch>...

  • Page 890: Calculate:Data:mdata:interpolate

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Ch>:DATA:MDATa:INTerpolate Uses linear inter-/extrapolation to "regrid" all memory traces of the related channel to the channel's current stimulus values. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Usage: Event CALCulate<Ch>:DATA:SGRoup? <Format> Reads the current response values of all S-parameters associated to a group of logical ports (S-parameter group).
  • Page 891 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <Data> Trace data either in ASCII or block data format, depending on the current setting. FORMat[:DATA] Parameters for setting and query: <Format> FDATa | SDATa | MDATa | TSData | NCData | UCData | SCORr1 | SCORr2 | SCORr3 | SCORr4 | SCORr5 | SCORr6 | SCORr7 | SCORr8 | SCORr9 | SCORr10 | SCORr11 | SCORr12 | SCORr13 | SCORr14 | SCORr15 | SCORr16 |...
  • Page 892 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference The following parameters are related to trace data (see also diagram in Chapter 4.1.6, "Data flow", on page 93): Table 7-2: Data format identifiers used in the CALCulate:DATA... commands FDATa Formatted trace data, according to the selected trace format (CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat).

  • Page 893: Calculate:Data:nsweep[:Last]

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Error Term Description Receive Ports (S-parameter) SCORr24 Transmission tracking 3 (S32) SCORr25 Isolation 2 (S23) SCORr26 Load match 2 (S23) SCORr27 Transmission tracking 2 (S23) Note: The error terms are channel-specific; they apply to the active calibration of chan- nel no.

  • Page 894: Calculate:Data:nsweep:count

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: SWE:COUN 10 Define the number of sweeps (10) to be measured in single sweep mode. INIT:CONT OFF; :INIT; *OPC? Activate single sweep mode and start a single sweep sequence in channel no. 1. Wait until the single sweep sequence is com- plete.
  • Page 895 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference <FwCount> Number of first sweep to be read. 1 denotes the first sweep acquired, 2 denotes the second and so forth. The sweep count in single sweep mode is defined via [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep: COUNt. Range: 1 to sweep count <FwCountEnd>...
  • Page 896 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Position> See list of parameters below. Default unit: NN Example: *RST; :CALC:DLIN 10 Define the position of the horizontal line in the default dB Mag diagram at +10 dB.
  • Page 897 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Query parameters: <Data> If omitted, a single numeric value is returned. If ALL is specified, the result consists of 6 numeric values. Furthermore, the inter- pretation of the result values depends on the active trace's stim- ulus axis (CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:XAXis).
  • Page 898 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Skew Fail Beep" on page 759 CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:LIMit:LIMit <arg0> Defines the limit value for the skew check. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <arg0> Limit value in seconds or meters, depending on the format of the current trace's stimulus axis (see CALCulate<Chn>: TRANsform:TIME:XAXis).
  • Page 899 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Note: The skew measurement can only be performed if the following conditions are met for both the active trace and the reference trace: ● the trace format is real (CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat REAL) ● Time Domain is enabled (CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:STATe ●...
  • Page 900 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference ..............904 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:LENGth:BITS ..............905 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:LENGth:PRBS ................ 905 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:MODulation ................906 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:OLEVel ................906 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:ZLEVel ...............906 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:RTIMe:DATA ...............906 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:RTIMe:THReshold ..............907 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:DIRac:DELTa ............. 907 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:DIRac:PROBability ............908 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:PERiodic:FREQuency ............908 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:PERiodic:MAGNitude ..............908 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:PERiodic:PHASe ............909 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:RANDom:STDDeviation ................
  • Page 901 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:DUT:MODE <DUTMode> Allows to (temporarily) switch between the measured DUT and an ideal one (with flat frequency response) in the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
  • Page 902 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <Weight> Weight relative to the "Cursor" tap *RST: 0 dB Default unit: dB Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Cursor Settings" on page 746 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:EMPHasis:STATe <Boolean> Activates/deactivates pre-emphasis in the calculation chain of the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
  • Page 903 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference The equalizer can be enabled/disabled using CALCulate<Chn>:EYE: EQUalization:STATe. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <1|2> Parameters: <CTLE Poles> Default unit: Hz Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "CTLE Equalizer" on page 751 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:EQUalization:CTLE:ZERO <CTLE Zero>...

  • Page 904: Calculate:Eye:input:length:bits

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:BPATtern:TYPE <BitPattern> Defines the type of bit stream to be simulated for the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram. Suffix: <Chn>...
  • Page 905 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Before executing this command, the pattern type must be set to USER (see CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:BPATtern:TYPE). Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <BitLength> Stream length, specified with units BITS, KIBITS (2^10 BITS), MIBITS (2^20 BITS), or GIBITS (2^30 BITS) Default unit: BITS Options:...

  • Page 906: Calculate:Eye:input:olevel

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:OLEVel <OneLevel> CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:ZLEVel <VoltageLevel> Defines the highest/lowest (nominal) voltage level of the simulated digital signal gener- ating the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
  • Page 907 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <RiseThreshold> T1_9 | T2_8 T1_9: 10% to 90% (of the voltage amplitude between 1-level and 0-level) This is the default threshold for eye diagrams. T2_8: 20% to 80% Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Rise Time / Rise Time Definition"...
  • Page 908 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:PERiodic:FREQuency <PeriodicFrequency> Defines the frequency of the periodic jitter in the generator simulation of the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
  • Page 909 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <PeriodicPhase> *RST: 0 deg Default unit: deg Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Periodic" on page 748 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:RANDom:STDDeviation <StdDeviation> Defines the standard deviation of the random jitter in the generator simulation of the related eye diagram.

  • Page 910: Calculate:Eye:jitter:periodic:magnitude

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Active" on page 747 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:TYPE:DIRac <Boolean> Enables/disables Dirac jitter insertion in the generator simulation of the related eye dia- gram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.

  • Page 911: Calculate:Eye:mask Auto

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:TYPE:RANDom <Boolean> Enables/disables random jitter insertion in the generator simulation of the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram. The standard deviation can be set using CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:RANDom: STDDeviation.

  • Page 912: Calculate:Eye:mask:data

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Automatic Mask Generation" on page 756 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:CENTer:HORizontal <HorizontalOffset> Defines the horizontal center of the eye mask in the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.

  • Page 913: Calculate:Eye:mask:fail

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: CALCulate1:EYE:MASK:DATA? returns something like 'Eye Mask ------------------------------ Fail Condition Type Samples Violation Tolerance 1 Total Number of Samples 10342 Mask 1 (Top) Active Samples Hits 366 Fail Rate 3.539 % Test Result Fail Mask 2 (Bottom) Not Active Samples Hits ------ Fail Rate ------...
  • Page 914 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Return values: <TestResults> Usage: Query only Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Mask Test On" on page 752 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:FAIL:BEEP <Boolean> Defines whether the R&S ZNA should make an audible beep on mask failures in the related eye diagram.

  • Page 915: Calculate:Eye:mask:shape:bottom:state

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:BOTTom:STATe <Boolean> CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:STATe <Boolean> CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:TOP:STATe <Boolean> Activates/deactivates the respective area in the eye mask of the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.

  • Page 916: Calculate:Eye:mask:shape:polygon:type

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:BOTTom:STATe CALCulate<Chn>: to activate or deactivate the area in the eye mask. EYE:MASK:SHAPe:TOP:STATe The eye mask test is enabled/disabled using CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:STATe. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Offset> Default unit: V Options: R&S ZNA-K20...
  • Page 917 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Polygon Setup" on page 754 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:VERTical <Main>[, <Minor>] Defines the main [and minor] height of the center polygon in the mask of the related eye diagram. The geometric interpretation depends on the selected polygon type (see on page 916): CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:TYPE...

  • Page 918: Calculate:Eye:measurement:data

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <Boolean> *RST: Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Mask Test On" on page 752 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:VIOLation:RATE <ViolationRate> Defines the violation rate (i.e. the share of bad samples) for the mask test in the related eye diagram.
  • Page 919 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference The return value is of type string and returns the eye measurement results in csv for- mat with decimal separator "." and field separator "," (see also MMEMory:STORe:EYE: MEASurements). Note that the full set of measurement results is only available for NRZ modulated gen- erator signals (see on page 905).

  • Page 920: Calculate:Eye:measurement:state

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MEASurement:STATe <Boolean> Defines the visibility of the result info field in the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram. Suffix: <Chn>...
  • Page 921 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <NoiseRMS> Default unit: V Manual operation: "RMS" on page 749 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:NOISe:STATe <Boolean> Enables/disables Gaussian noise in the generator simulation of the related eye dia- gram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
  • Page 922 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <Boolean> *RST: Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Encoder" on page 744 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:STIMulus:LOWPass <Boolean> Enables/disables a single pole low pass filter in the binary signal generator simulation of the related eye diagram measurement. The low-pass is defined using its rise time (see CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut: on page 906) and rise time definition (see...
  • Page 923 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <EyeView> STIMulus | EMPHasis | JITTer | NOISe | DUT | EQUalization The rightmost building block that shall be part of the calculation chain STIMulus > EMPHasis > JITTer > NOISe > DUT > EQUali- zation.
  • Page 924 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: *RST; :CALCulate1:TRANsform:TIME:STATe ON CALCulate1:FILTer:GATE:TIME:STATe ON; SHOW ON Activate time domain representation and a time gate in channel no. 1. Display the time gate CALCulate1:FILTer:GATE:TIME:STARt 2ns; STOP 3 Restrict the time gate to the time interval between 2 ns and 3 ns. CALCulate:FILTer:GATE:TIME:AOFFset ON Activate an offset of the time gate according to a new delay set- ting.
  • Page 925 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <CenterTime> Center time of the time gate Range: -99.8999999 s to +99.8999999 s Increment: 0.1 ns *RST: 1.5E-009 s Default unit: s Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:TIME:STAT ON; :CALC:FILT:TIME: STAT ON Reset the instrument and enable the time domain representation and the time gate.
  • Page 926 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <TimeGate> MAXimum | WIDE | NORMal | MINimum MINimum - Steepest edges (rectangle) WIDE - Normal gate (Hann) NORM - Steep edges (Hamming) Maximum - Maximum flatness (Bohman) *RST: WIDE...
  • Page 927 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STARt <StartTime> CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STOP <StopTime> These commands define the start and stop times of the time gate, respectively. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <StopTime> Start or stop time of the time gate. Range: -100 s to +99.999999999998 s (start time ) and -99.999999999998 s to +100 s (stop time)
  • Page 928 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:WINDow <TimeGate> Selects the time gate to be applied to the time domain transform. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <TimeGate> RECT | HAMMing | HANNing | BOHMan | DCHebyshev RECT - steepest edges (rectangle) HANN - normal gate (Hann) HAMMing - steep edges (Hamming)
  • Page 929 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference ...............934 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:M1L:LENGth ...............934 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:M2L:LENGth ...............934 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:M3L:LENGth ............934 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:M1L:MEASure ............934 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:M2L:MEASure ............934 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:M3L:MEASure ............... 934 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:M1L[:STATe] ............... 934 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:M2L[:STATe] ............... 934 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:M3L[:STATe] ................935 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M1L:DIFFmode ................. 935 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:MEASurement ..............935 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:METHod ..............936 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:PORDer ................936 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:RUN...
  • Page 930 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:CURRent? Returns the frequencies at which the Delta-L algorithm calculates the loss-per-inch uncertainties. You can use the algorithms's default or custom frequencies (see CALCulate: FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:USEDefault). Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored Usage: Query only Options: R&S ZNA-K231 Manual operation:...
  • Page 931 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference to query the CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:DEFault? frequencies. Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored Usage: Query only Options: R&S ZNA-K231 Manual operation: "Frequencies" on page 700 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:USEDefault <Boolean> Delta-L computes the uncertainty in the loss-per-inch calculation at specified frequen- cies.
  • Page 932 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:USER:COUNt? The Delta-L algorithm can calculate the loss-per-inch uncertainties either at default or at custom frequencies (see CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies: USEDefault). This command returns the number of custom frequencies, defined using CALCulate: etc. FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:USER:ADD Suffix: <Ph_pt>...
  • Page 933 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Frequencies" on page 700 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:M1L:CACHe:CLEar:ALL If the 1-length method is used (CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:METHod M1L), the VNA firmware builds up a cache of coupon measurements (Touchstone files) in the DeltaL\1LMeasurementCache subfolder of the user data folder C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNA.
  • Page 934 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <String> Path to the Touchstone file, either absolute or relative to the selected working directory (CALCulate:FMODel: DELT<Ph_pt>:DIRectory). Options: R&S ZNA-K231 R&S ZNA-K231 Manual operation: "Load File" on page 703 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:M1L:LENGth <Length> CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:M2L:LENGth <Length> CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:M3L:LENGth <Length>...
  • Page 935 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Suffix: <Ph_pt> Physical port number Parameters: <Boolean> ON (1) Port <Ph_pt> is active in the respective measurement OFF (0) Port <Ph_pt> is inactive in the respective measurement Options: R&S ZNA-K231 Manual operation: "Ports table" on page 703 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M1L:DIFFmode <Boolean>...
  • Page 936 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored. Parameters: <Method> M1L | M2L | M3L One, two, or three line/length analysis Options: R&S ZNA-K231 Manual operation: "Method" on page 700 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:PORDer <PortOrder> Declares how the DUT is connected to the measurement system. Choosing the wrong port ordering for your setup, can result in erroneous results.
  • Page 937 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored Parameters: <SweepControl> DEFault | CURRent DEFault Use the default values of the Delta-L algorithm: 10 MHz frequency step size, 1 kHz IF bandwidth SweepControl Use the values of the active channel Options: R&S ZNA-K231 Manual operation:...
  • Page 938 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:SWEep:CONTrol:STEP? For the Delta-L measurement, the firmware can either use a default frequency step size, or the active channel setting (see CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:SWEep: CONTrol). This query returns the resulting frequency step size. Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored Usage: Query only...
  • Page 939 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference OFF (0) Display all traces in a single diagram. Options: R&S ZNA-K231 Manual operation: "Trace" on page 701 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:TDR <Boolean> If the Time domain analysis option R&S ZNA-K2 is installed, this command allows you to add the TDR-based converted impedance traces to the recommended trace configu- ration.
  • Page 940 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <String> Path to the Touchstone file, either absolute or relative to the selected working directory (CALCulate:FMODel:DIRectory). Options: R&S ZNA-K210 Manual operation: "Load File / 1x Open Preset / 1x Short Preset" on page 677 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure:FILename:CLEar Invalidates the file path previously set using CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Ph_pt>:...
  • Page 941 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference OFF (0) The frequencies only reach down to the start frequency of the instrument sweep. Options: R&S ZNA-K210 Manual operation: "DC Extrapolation" on page 687 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Ph_pt>:DUT:MEASure For a fixture modeling with the EZD tool, this command allows to measure "DUT + Test Fixture"...
  • Page 942 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Ph_pt>:DUT[:STATe] <Boolean> Suffix: <Ph_pt> Parameters: <Boolean> Manual operation: "Active" on page 678 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Ph_pt>:GENerate:SIDE<1|2> <Boolean> The EZD tool can create fixture deembedding data at side 1, at side 2, or at both sides. Suffix: <Ph_pt>...
  • Page 943 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Ph_pt>:IMPedance:REFerence <Value> Suffix: <Ph_pt> Parameters: <Value> Default unit: Ohm Manual operation: "Impedance Corrected/Impedance Correction Settings" on page 687 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Ph_pt>:PORT:ORDer <PortOrder> Tells the EZD tool about the port ordering of the test fixture. Suffix: <Ph_pt>...
  • Page 944 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference The resulting Touchstone files are written to C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde- Schwarz\ZNA\Embedding. If result files with the same name already exist, they are overwritten. Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored Usage: Event Options: R&S ZNA-K210 Manual operation: "Run <Fixture Modeling Tool>"...
  • Page 945 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference ..............949 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:DUT[:STATe] ..............950 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:FTIMe:DUT ............950 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:FTIMe:OVERride ..............950 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:OPERation ..............951 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PASSivity ..............951 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:ORDer ..............951 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP ............952 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP:LEFT ............952 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP:NONE ............952 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP:RIGHt .................952 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PRESet ..............952 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:RUN:RUN ..............
  • Page 946 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Measure / Measure Open / Measure Short" on page 676 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure:FILename <String> For a fixture modeling with the ISD tool and coupon types SYMMetric2x | OPEN1x | SHORt1x (see CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:TYPE), this command loads the coupon properties from a Touchstone file.
  • Page 947 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored. Parameters: <String> Path to the Touchstone file, either absolute or relative to the selected working directory (CALCulate:FMODel:DIRectory). Manual operation: "Load File / 1x Open Preset / 1x Short Preset" on page 677 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure:SHORt For a fixture modeling with the ISD tool and coupon type OPSHort1x (see...
  • Page 948 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon[:STATe] <Boolean> For a fixture modeling with the ISD tool, this command allows to specify the ports to which the test coupon is connected. This has to be defined before measuring the test coupon (using CALCulate:FMODel: ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:...
  • Page 949 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:DUT:MEASure:FILename <String> For a fixture modeling with the ISD tool, this command loads the "DUT + Test Fixture" properties from a Touchstone file. Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored. Parameters: <String> Path to the Touchstone file, either absolute or relative to the selected working directory (CALCulate:FMODel:DIRectory).
  • Page 950 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: Chapter 8.2.8, "Fixture modeling", on page 1628 Manual operation: "Active" on page 678 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:FTIMe:DUT <FltDutAndLeadIns> is set to TRUE, this com- CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:FTIMe:OVERride mand allows to set the flight time for DUT + Lead-ins manually. This is equivalent to setting the leadin_dut_time batch mode parameter of the ISD tool to a numeric value (not auto).
  • Page 951 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PASSivity <Boolean> Defines whether the ISD tool shall enforce passivity and reciprocity for the test cou- pons and the test fixture. Corresponds to the passive batch mode parameter of the ISD tool. Suffix: <Ph_pt>...
  • Page 952 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP:LEFT CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP:NONE CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP:RIGHt Tells the ISD tool which ports (in the measured DUT + Test Fixture file) shall be skip- ped when the tool is run. ● ...:LEFT: skip the ports on the left (according to the port order specified using CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:ORDer) ●...
  • Page 953 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference The resulting Touchstone files are written to C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde- Schwarz\ZNA\Embedding. If result files with the same name already exist, they will be overwritten. Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored. Example: Chapter 8.2.8, "Fixture modeling", on page 1628 Usage: Event...
  • Page 954 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Max Freq to Deembed" on page 684 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:SCALe:FTIMe <FltLeadInScalingTime> Overrides the lead-in’s flight time in case the through-trace test coupon is a bit too short or too long. Sets/gets the atten_scale 1 batch mode parameter of the ISD tool. Suffix: <Ph_pt>...
  • Page 955 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:SFD... Commands for PacketMicro's Smart Fixture De-embedding (SFD), see https:// www.packetmicro.com/Products/sfd-tool.html ................955 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:AUTO ............955 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure ........955 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure:FILename ......956 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure:FILename:CLEar ............956 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:COUPon[:STATe] .............956 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:TYPE ................957 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:DIFFcfg .............. 957 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:DUT:MEASure ..........957 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:DUT:MEASure:FILename ........

  • Page 956: Calculate:fmodel:sfd:Coupon:measure

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference The coupon type can be selected using CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>: COUPon:TYPE. Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored. Parameters: <String> Path to the Touchstone file, either absolute or relative to the selected working directory (CALCulate:FMODel:DIRectory). Manual operation: "Load File / 1x Open Preset / 1x Short Preset"...

  • Page 957: Calculate:fmodel:sfd:Dut:measure

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:DIFFcfg <SFDPortConfig> Tells the SFD tool about the port ordering of the 2x Thru test coupon. Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored. Parameters: <SFDPortConfig> ODD | NON ODD: odd ports are on the left and even ports are on the right NON: ports 1 to N are on the left and ports N+1 to 2·N are on the right Manual operation:...

  • Page 958: Calculate:fmodel:sfd:Preset

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:PRESet Restores the default settings of the SFD tool. Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored. Usage: Event Manual operation: "Reset to Default" on page 675 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:DUT[:STATe] <Boolean> For a fixture modeling with the SFD tool, this command allows to specify the ports to which the test fixture is connected.
  • Page 959 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:RUN[:STATe] <Boolean> For a fixture modeling with the SFD tool, this command allows to specify the ports to which the deembedding files shall be assigned after the tool has run. Suffix: <Ph_pt> Physical port number for single-ended deembedding, logical port number for balanced deembedding.
  • Page 960 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:DIRectory:DEFault:CLEar Deletes all files in the common default working directory of the of the ISD, SFD, and EZD tool (C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNA\Embedding). Usage: Event Manual operation: "Output Settings" on page 674 CALCulate:FMODel:REName <Boolean> If set to ON (1), the names of subsequently generated "Test Coupon" and "DUT + Test Fixture"...
  • Page 961 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Manual operation: "dB Mag" on page 374 Assume that the result at a sweep point is given by the complex quantity z = x + jy. Then the magnitude of z is calculated as |z| = sqrt(x and in phase notation we have j Phase(z)
  • Page 962 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <Unit> POWer | VOLTage Power or voltage units *RST: POWer CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'b1' Example: Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the wave quantity b . The trace becomes the active trace in channel CALC4:FORM:WQUT VOLT Select voltage units for the created trace (identified by the suffix Manual operation:...
  • Page 963 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF | 1 | 0 *RST: Manual operation: "Reset History" on page 353 CALCulate<Chn>:IAVerage:MODE <Mode> Selects the quantities to be averaged if infinite averaging is enabled (CALCulate<Chn>:IAVerage[:STATe] Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Mode>...
  • Page 964 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Auto Linearity Deviation" on page 429 CALCulate<Chn>:LDEViation:CONStant <Constant> Defines the constant value for the linearity deviation calculation. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace. Parameters: <Constant> Constant value Range: The range depends on the trace format.
  • Page 965 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference TRACking - Repeat calculation for each measured trace and apply the correction. *RST: 0 dB/MHz Example: on page 963 CALCulate<Chn>:LDEViation:AUTO Manual operation: "On" on page 429 CALCulate<Chn>:LDEViation:SLOPe <Slope> Defines the slope of the regression line for the linearity deviation calculation. Suffix: <Chn>...
  • Page 966 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference ................973 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:UPPer[:DATA] ................975 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:LOWer:FEED ................975 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:UPPer:FEED ................976 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:LOWer:SHIFt ................976 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:UPPer:SHIFt ..........976 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:AMPLitude:STARt ..........976 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:AMPLitude:STOP ...............977 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent:COUNt? ............977 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:FORMula ..........978 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:FORMula:STATe ............. 978 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:INTerpol ..........979 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:STIMulus:STARt ..........979 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:STIMulus:STOP ..............979 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:TYPE ................

  • Page 967: Calculate:Limit:circle[:State]

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Usage: Query only CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CIRCle[:STATe] <Boolean> Switches the circle limit check on or off. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> Example: *RST; CALCulate:LIMit:CIRCle:DATA 0, 0, 0.5 Define a circle limit line centered around the origin of the polar diagram, assigning a radius of 0.5 U.

  • Page 968: Calculate:Limit:circle:fail

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CIRCle:DISPlay[:STATe] <Boolean> Displays or hides the circle limit line associated to the active trace. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - Circle limit line on or off. *RST: Example: *RST;...

  • Page 969: Calculate:Limit:clear

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CLEar Resets the limit check results for the limit line test. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Usage: Event Manual operation: "Clear Test" on page 433 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CONTrol[:DATA] <StartStim>, <StopStim>[, ...] Defines the stimulus values of the limit line and/or creates new limit line segments.

  • Page 970: Calculate:Limit:control:shift

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: *RST; :CALC:LIM:CONT 1 GHZ, 2 GHZ Select a lin. frequency sweep (default) and define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz, using default response values (–40 dB). CALC:LIM:DISP ON Show the limit line segment in the active diagram.

  • Page 971: Calculate:Limit:dcircle[:State]

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Range: 0, 1, 2 (see above) <StartStim>, Stimulus and response values of the first and last points of the <StopStim>, limit line segment. <StartResp>, The unit of the stimulus values is adjusted to the sweep type of <StopResp>...

  • Page 972: Calculate:Limit:dcircle:display[:State]

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <CenterX> X position (real part) of the display circle's center <CenterY> Y position (imaginary part) of the display circle's center <Radius> Radius of the display circle Manual operation: "Draw Circle / Radius, Center X, Center Y"...
  • Page 973 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - Limit line on or off. *RST: Example: *RST; :CALC:LIM:CONT 1 GHZ, 2 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz, using default response values. CALC:LIM:DISP ON Show the limit line segment in the active diagram.
  • Page 974 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:LOWer/UPPer sets the type and response values of even/odd limit line segments and gets the response values of even/odd limit line seg- ments - no matter what the current type of these segments actually is! Both commands will only work, if the total number of limit line segments is even.

  • Page 975: Calculate:Limit:lower:feed

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: CALC:LIM:LOW -10, 0, 0, -10 Define two limit line segments covering the entire sweep range. Two upper limit line segments with default response values are created in addition. CALC:LIM:UPP 0, 10, 10, 0 Change the response values of the upper limit line segments .

  • Page 976: Calculate:Limit:upper:feed

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:LOWer:SHIFt <LimShift> CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:UPPer:SHIFt <LimShift> These commands shift all lower and upper limit line segments assigned to the active trace in vertical direction. Both commands shift all limit lines; they have the same func- tionality.

  • Page 977: Calculate:Limit:segment:count

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: CALC:LIM:DATA 1,1500000000, 2000000000,2,3 Define an upper limit line segment (segment no. 1) in the stimu- lus range between 1.5 GHz and 2 GHz, assigning response val- ues of +2 dB and +3 dB. :CALC:LIM:SEGM:AMPL:STAR 5;...

  • Page 978: Calculate:Limit:segment:Interpol

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: *RST SENS:FREQ:STAR 1GHz SENS:FREQ:STOP 3GHz CALC:LIM:CONT 1GHz, 2GHz, 2GHz, 3GHz CALC:LIM:SEGM1:FORM '22-(20/25.78)*StimVal/1e9' CALC:LIM:SEGM1:FORM:STAT ON CALC:LIM:SEGM2:FORM '15-(6/25.78)*StimVal/1e9' CALC:LIM:SEGM2:TYPE LMIN CALC:LIM:DISP ON CALC:LIM:STAT ON Manual operation: "Linear/Formula" on page 439 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:FORMula:STATe <State> Defines whether a custom formula is used for limit line segment <Seg> of the related trace.
  • Page 979 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Segment List" on page 436 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:STIMulus:STARt <FreqPowTime> CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:STIMulus:STOP <StimVal> These commands change the start and stop stimulus values (i.e. the smallest and the largest stimulus values) of a limit line segment. A segment must be created first to enable the commands (e.g CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DATA).
  • Page 980 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Seg> Segment number Parameters: <LimLineType> LMIN | LMAX | OFF Limit line type Range: LMAX (upper limit line segment), LMIN (lower limit line segment), OFF (limit check switched off, limit line segment not deleted) *RST: LMAX...
  • Page 981 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: *RST; CALC:LIM:CONT 1 GHZ, 2 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz, using default response values. CALC:LIM:STAT ON; FAIL? Switch the limit check on and query the result. Manual operation: "Limit Check"...
  • Page 982 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference 7.3.1.14 CALCulate:MARKer... The CALCulate:MARKer... commands control the marker functions. The com- mands are device-specific and beyond what is specified in the SCPI subsystem SOURce:MARKer................. 983 CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled[:STATe] ................983 CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled:TYPE ............984 CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:BWIDth:GMCenter ................ 984 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer[:STATe]:AREA ..............

  • Page 983: Calculate:marker:coupled[:State]

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference ................1005 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:TYPE .................1006 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:X .................1006 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:Y CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled[:STATe] <Boolean> Enables marker coupling to the active trace of the active channel or disables it. to select the suitable coupling type before CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled:TYPE setting CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled:STATe to ON. Parameters: <Boolean>...
  • Page 984 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: on page 983 CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled[:STATe] Manual operation: "Coupling Type" on page 472 CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:BWIDth:GMCenter <arg0> Defines how bandfilter searches calculate the center frequency of the passband or stopband. Parameters: <arg0> ON – use geometric mean of lower and upper band edge OFF –...
  • Page 985 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <OutFormat> MLINear | MLOGarithmic | PHASe | POLar | GDELay | REAL | IMAGinary | SWR | LINPhase | LOGPhase | IMPedance | ADMittance | DEFault | COMPlex | MDB | MLPHase | MDPHase | MIMPedance | PIMPedance | PADMittance | MADMittance | MPIMpedance | MPADmittance | INDX | NOISe DEFault means the default marker format is dynamically adjus-...

  • Page 986: Calculate:Marker:Function:spectrum

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference SCPI MIMPedance "Imp Mag" for reflection measurement traces "Imp Mag series" for transmission measurement traces MPIMpedance "Imp Mag" for reflection measurement traces "Imp Mag parallel" for transmission measurement traces MADMittance "Adm Mag" for reflection measurement traces "Adm Mag series"...
  • Page 987 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Excursion Settings" on page 463 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:MPEak:EXCursion:STATe <Boolean> Activates or deactivates the minimum excursion for multiple peak searches. to set the minimum peak excur- CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:MPEak:EXCursion sion. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Active>...

  • Page 988: Calculate:Marker:search:bfilter:result[:State]:Area

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON - show the bandfilter search results. If no bandfilter search has been initiated before (CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>: BFILter), nothing is displayed. FUNCtion:EXECute OFF - hide the bandfilter search results. *RST: Example: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:BWIDth Manual operation: "Result Off"...
  • Page 989 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:BWIDth <Bandwidth> Sets the bandfilter level for a bandfilter search or returns the results. The command is only available after a bandfilter search has been executed (CALCulate<Chn>: BFILter; see example below). MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute The response to the query CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:BWIDth? contains the following bandfilter search results: ●...

  • Page 990: Calculate:Marker:Delta[:State]

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:BWID:MODE BST Select a bandstop filter search. CALC:MARK:FUNC:EXEC BFIL Initiate the bandpass filter search for the current trace. Create markers M1 to M4. CALC:MARK:SEAR:BFIL:RES ON Display the marker info field in the diaram area. CALC:MARK:BWID 6 Select a 6-dB bandwidth for the bandstop.

  • Page 991: Calculate:Marker:Excursion

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference <Mk> Marker number Parameters: <Value> Minimum peak excursion The unit is derived from the active trace format and cannot be modified. Changing the trace format resets the excursion to a format-specific default value. Manual operation: "Excursion Settings"...

  • Page 992: Calculate:Marker:Function:center

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:BWIDth:MODE <BandfilterType> Selects the bandfilter search mode. In contrast to manual control, bandfilter tracking is not automatically activated. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk> This numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value because the bandfilter search functions always use markers M1 to M4.

  • Page 993: Calculate:Marker:Function:domain:user[:Range]

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER[:RANGe] <NumSearchRange> Assigns a search range no. <NumSearchRange> to marker no <Mk> and selects the search range, e.g. in order to display range limit lines or define the start and stop val- ues. Suffix: <Chn>...

  • Page 994: Calculate:Marker:Function:domain:user:start

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER:STARt <StarSearchRange> CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER:STOP <StopSearchRange> These commands define the start and stop values of the search range selected via CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER[:RANGe]. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk> Marker number. Parameters: <StopSearchRange>...

  • Page 995: Calculate:Marker:Function:execute

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Mode Find... MAXimum Absolute maximum in the search range (see CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>: FUNCtion:DOMain:USER[:RANGe] MINimum Absolute maximum in the search range RPEak Next valid peak to the right of the current marker position LPEak Next valid peak to the left NPEak Next highest or lowest value among the valid peaks (next peak) TARGet...

  • Page 996: Calculate:Marker:Function:start

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: *RST; :CALC:MARK ON; MARK:DELTa ON Create marker 1 in the center of the current sweep range and enable the delta mode. CALC:MARK:X 300MHz Increase the stimulus value of the delta marker by 300 MHz. CALC:MARK:FUNC:SPAN Set the sweep range equal to 300 MHz.
  • Page 997 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <Mode> CONTinuous | DISCrete CONTinuous - marker can be positioned on any point of the trace, and its response values are obtained by interpolation. DISCrete - marker can be set to discrete sweep points only. *RST: CONT Example:...
  • Page 998 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: Suppose that the active recall set contains an active trace no. 1. CALC:MARK:REF ON; :CALC:MARK ON Create the reference marker and marker 1 and assign them to trace no. 1. The default position of both markers is the center of the sweep range.

  • Page 999: Calculate:Marker:Name

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: Suppose that the active recall set contains an active trace no. 1. CALC:MARK:REF:MODE DISC CALC:MARK2:REF:MODE CONT Create the reference marker in discrete mode and marker 2 in continuous mode. CALC:MARK:REF ON; :CALC:MARK2 ON Display the two markers.
  • Page 1000 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:X <StimulusValue>[, <Seg>[, <MeasPoint>]] In NORMal or FIXed marker mode (see CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:TYPE) this command sets or gets the stimulus value of the reference marker. In ARBitrary mode this is only true if the X axis represents the stimulus. For all other trace formats (see CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat) it sets or gets the X position of the reference marker, which is decoupled from the marker stimulus in this case.

This manual is also suitable for:

Zna43Zna50Zna671332.4500k221332.4500k241332.4500k42 ... Show all

Table of Contents